Chevrolet 1998 Corvette Owners Manual Owner's

2015-10-23

: Chevrolet Chevrolet-1998-Chevrolet-Corvette-Owners-Manual-813508 chevrolet-1998-chevrolet-corvette-owners-manual-813508 chevrolet pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 378 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

..
f
The
1998
Chevrolet Corvette Owner’s Manual
1-1
2-1
3-1
4-1
5-1
6-1
7-
1
8-
1
9-1
Seats and Restraint Systems
This section tells you how to use your seats and safety belts properly. It also explains the air bag system.
Features and Controls
This section explains how to start and operate your vehicle.
Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
This section tells you how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how to operate your audio system.
Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find helpful information
and
tips about the road and how to drive under different conditions.
Problems on the Road
This section tells what to do
if
you have a problem while driving, such as a flat tire or overheated engine, etc.
Service and Appearance Care
Here the manual tells you how
to
keep your vehicle running properly and looking good.
Maintenance Schedule
This section tells you when to perform vehicle maintenance and what fluids and lubricants to use.
Customer Assistance Information
This section tells you how to contact Chevrolet for assistance and how to get service and owner publications.
It also gives you information on “Reporting Safety Defects” on page
8-10.
Index
Here’s an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual. You can use it to quickly find
something you want to read.
i
k!
CHEVROLET
c
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem and the
name CORVETTE
are
registered trademarks of
General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes in the
product after that time without further notice. For
vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name
“General Motors of Canada Limited” for Chevrolet
Motor Division whenever it appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle,
so
it will be
there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you
sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it
so
the new
owner can use it.
Litho in
U.S.A.
Part
No.
10282340
A
First Edition
sq
TlFlED
&
d
WE SUPPORT
VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN
CERTIFICATION
THROUGH
National
Institute
for
AUTOMOTIVE
SERVICE
EXCELLENCE
For Canadian Owners
Who
Prefer a
French Language Manual:
Aux
proprietaires canadiens:
Vous pouvez vous
procurer un exemplaire de
ce
guide en franGais chez
votre concessionaire ou au:
DGN Marketing Services Ltd.
1500 Bonhill Rd.
Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1C7
@Copyright General Motors Corporation 1997
All Rights Reserved
ii
CORVETTE: THE AMERICAN
DREAM MACHINE
In the early
O OS,
it was only a designer’s dream. Today
the Corvette stands alone as America’s dream car
--
a
testament to its unmistakable charisma and the
excitement it inspires. Unique styling, powerful
performance and an undeniable panache have made
Corvette one
of
the most celebrated sports cars in
the world.
In
1953,
Corvette produced
300
new lightweight
fiberglass roadsters.
A
handful went to project
engineers, General Motors managers, and a select group
of
movie stars and celebrities. With a two-speed
Powerglide automatic transmission, Blue Flame
six-cylinder engine, and gleaming Polo White exterior,
the Corvette began its drive into the heart
of
America.
Designers freshened up the ’Vette in
1956
by adding a
removable hardtop and the famous Corvette “coves.”
The sculptured body enhanced its sporty look, and a
standard 210-horsepower Chevy V8 engine solidified
Corvette’s reputation as a production race car.
iii
In 1963, Corvette hit the road with an eye-catching new
look
--
the Sting Ray coupe. An instant success, the
now-classic Sting Ray featured concealed headlamps
and a unique split rear window. The split window would
only be offered in
1963,
making this model among the
most prized Corvettes ever built.
Restyled inside and out for 1968, this 'Vette sported a
lean and hungry shape, creating a sense of motion even
when standing still.
And
for the first time, Corvette
offered removable roof panels.
iv
For its 25th anniversary, the
1978
Corvette paced the 62nd Annual Indianapolis
500
and received a new fastback
roofline with a wide expanse of glass that wrapped around the sides.
V
In 1984, the fourth generation of America’s favorite
sports car anticipated the future with a sleek look and
advanced technology that provided superior handling
and performance. Windshield angle was the sheerest of
any domestic vehicle, cornering ability the tightest of
any production car. In short, the 1984 redesign enhanced
the Corvette’s reputation as a leader in the world sports
car market.
After 44 years
of
production, Corvette only got better.
The fifth-generation Corvette arrived in 1997, featuring
a completely restyled body and a new, all-aluminum,
5.7
Liter, 345-horsepower LS1 V8 engine. The
structure of the fifth-generation redesign is the stiffest
ever developed in 44 years of Corvette production,
resulting in unparalleled ride quality and outstanding
handling. Also unique to the new Corvette is a
rear-mounted transmission.
Available as a Coupe for 1997, the new Corvette offered
such standard features as extended-mobility tires, a
Bose audio system, and
a
new, latch-operated roof
designed for easy removal.
With many design cues inspired by the classic models
of the 1960s, the new fifth-generation Corvette is an
impressive combination of sleek styling and world-class
sports car performance. For 1998, in addition to the
Coupe, a convertible is reintroduced.
vi
CORVETTE ASSEMBLY PLANT
The Corvette Assembly Plant in Bowling Green,
Kentucky is one
of
the most sophisticated and
computerized automobile assembly facilities in
the world.
To
build your 1998 Corvette, over
1,025 employes teamed up with the
58
high-tech
robots that assist in a variety of processes, from welding
to painting.
The Bowling Green facility is Corvette’s third home
since 1953. Since beginning production in June
of 198
1,
it has become one of Kentucky’s most
popular tourist attractions.
Corvette Assembly Plant tours are available. For
dates and times, call (502) 745-8419. Reservations
are required for groups of 10 or more. For more
information, call (502) 745-8228.
The new National Corvette Museum, located near the
assembly plant, opened its doors in September of 1994.
It
is
also attracting tourists to the area. For more
information, call 1-800-53-VETTE or (502) 781-7973.
>
vii
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Also, in this book you will find these notices:
KNOTICE:
r
These mean there is something that
could
damage
your
vehicle.
In the notice area, we tell you about something that
can damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage
would not be covered by your warranty, and it could
be costly. But the notice will tell you what to do to help
avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or
in
different words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
ix
Vehicle
Symbols
These are some
of
the
symbols
you
may
find
on
your
vehicle.
For example,
these symbols
are used on an
original battery:
POSSIBLE
A
CAUTION
INJURY
PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING
Q
CAUSTIC
These symbols
are
important
for you and
your passengers
whenever your
vehicle
is
driven:
DOOR LOCK
UNLOCK
ACID COULD
BAlTERY
CAUSE
BURNS
AVOID
SPARKS
OR
FLAMES
SPARK
OR
,\I/,
COULD
FLAME
EXPLODE
BAllERY
FASTEN
SEAT
BELTS
These symbols
have
to
do with
your lamps:
SIGNALS
TURN
A
FLASHER
FOG LAMPS
$0
These symbols
are on some
of
your controls:
WINDSHIELD
DEFROSTER
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
VENTILATING
FAN
These symbols
are
used
on
warning
and
indicator lights:
COOLANT
-
TEMP
-
CHARGING
I-1
BATTERY
SYSTEM
BRAKE
(@)
COOLANT
a
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
WA
ANTI-LOCK
(@)
BRAKES
Here are some
other symbols
you may see:
FUSE
t
LIGHTER
HORN
b
SPEAKER
b
FUEL
p3
X
Section
1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Here you’ll find information about the seats in your Corvette and how to use your safety belts properly.
You
can
also
learn about some things you should
not
do
with
air
bags and safety belts.
1-2 Seats and Seat Controls
1-
18 Air Bag System
1-5 Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone 1-25 Children
1
-
10 Here Are Questions Many People Ask About
Safety Belts
--
and the Answers 1-27 Child Restraints
After a Crash
1
-
18 Passenger Position 1-38 Replacing Restraint System Parts
1-17 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
1-37 Safety Belt Extender
1
-
11
How
to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1-34 Larger Children
1-11 Driver Position 1-37 Checking Your Restraint Systems
1-1
Seats
and
Seat
Controls
Power Seat
This part tells you about the seats
--
how to adjust them,
and also about reclining seatbacks and seatback latches.
Manual
Front Seat (Option, Passenger
Only)
Pull up on the lever in front
of
the seat to unlock it.
Slide the seat to where you want it. Then release the
lever and
try
to move the seat with your body to make
sure the seat
is
locked into place.
1-2
The switch for the power seats is located
on
the side of
each seat, near the base.
Different parts of the power seat control move different
parts
of
your seat.
If
you move the whole control, the
whole seat will move. The back
of
the control will raise
or lower the back
of
the seat, and the front of the control
will raise or lower the front of the seat.
Move the control to the front or to the back to move the
seat forward or backward. Move the control up to raise
the seat and down to lower it.
Your
preferred seat position can
be
stored and recalled if
you have the memory option.
See
“Memory”
in
the Index.
Sport Seat (Option) Reclining
Seatbacks
In addition to the power seat control, there are three
other switches that help
you
change the shape
of
your
seat. There are two lumbar supports
(A
and
B)
for the
middle and lower back. There’s also a side bolster
switch
(C)
that adjusts the sides
of
the seat around you
to
give
you
more lateral support.
For lumbar support, move each switch
(A
and
B)
forward to inflate or rearward to deflate.
Move the side bolster switch
(C)
up for more side
support and down for less support.
The lever for the reclining seatback
is
located on the
side
of
each seat, near the base.
To adjust the seatback, pull up on the lever and tilt the
seatback to where
you
want it. Release the lever to lock
the seatback into place.
1-3
But
don’t
have a seatback reclined if your vehicle
is
moving.
I
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle
up, your safety belts can’t do their job when
you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t do its job because it
won’t be against your body. Instead, it will be in
front of you. In
a
crash you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash the
belt could
go
up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is
in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well
back
in
the seat and wear your safety belt properly.
Seatback Latches
I
A
CAUTION:
Both seatbacks fold forward to give you access to the
rear area.
To
fold a seatback forward, lift this latch and
pull the seatback forward. The seatback will lock down
in this position.
To
unlock, lift up on the latch and push
the seatback rearward. When you return the seatback to
its original position, make sure the seatback is locked.
If
the seatback isn’t locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That
could cause injury to the person sitting there.
Always press rearward on the seatback to be
sure it is locked.
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts
properly. It also tells you some things
you
should not do
with safety belts.
And it explains the air bag system.
1-5
Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t wear
a safety belt properly.
If
you are in a crash and
you’re not wearing
a
safety belt, your injuries
can be much worse. You can hit things inside the
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously
injured or killed. In the same crash, you might
not be if you are buckled up. Always fasten your
safety belt, and check that your passenger’s belt
is
fastened properly too.
Your vehicle has a light that
comes on as a reminder to
buckle up. (See “Safety
Belt Reminder Light” in
the Index.)
In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to
wear safety belts. Here’s why:
They
work.
You never know if you’ll be in
a
crash.
If
you do have a
crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
A
few crashes
are
mild, and some crashes can be
so
serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between.
In
many of them, people
who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away.
Without belts
they
could have been badly hurt or
killed.
After more than
30
years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter
...
a lot!
It
is
extremely dangerous to ride in
a
cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In
a
collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
Do
not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle
is
in
a
seat and using
a
safety belt properly.
1-6
Why Safety Belts
Work
When you ride in or
on
anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it's just
a
seat
on wheels.
Put
someone
on
it.
1-7
c
Get
it
up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
doesn’t stop. The person keeps going until stopped
by
something.
In
a
real vehicle, it could be the windshield
...
or the instrument panel
...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You
get more time to stop.
You
stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s
why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-9
Here Are Questions Many People
Ask
About Safety Belts
--
and the Answers
Qt
Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A:
You
could
be
--
whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident,
so
you
can
unbuckle and get out, is
much
greater if
you
are
belted.
Qt
If
my
vehicle has air bags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A:
Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they
are
supplemental systems only;
so
they work
with
safety belts
--
not instead of them. Every air bag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has air
bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
&t
If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A:
You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an
accident
--
even one that isn’t your fault
--
you and
your passenger can be hurt. Being a good driver
doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within
25
miles
(40
km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less
than
40
mph
(65
km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
1-10
How
to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Adults
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about safety
belts and children.
And
there
are
different rules for smaller
children and babies.
If
a child
will
be ridmg
in
your
vehicle, see the
part
of
this
manual called “Children.”
Follow those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder
Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear
it properly.
1.
Close
and
lock the door.
2.
Adjust the seat (to see how, see “Seats” in the Index)
so you can sit up straight.
3.
Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across
you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
When the lap portion of the belt is pulled out all the
way, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way
and start again. See “Lap Belt Cinch Feature” in
the Index.
4.
Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
1-11
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If
the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned
so
you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low
and
snug
on
the hips, just touching the thighs.
In
a crash,
this
applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely
to slide under the lap belt.
If
you slid under it, the belt
would apply force at your abdomen.
This
could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the
body
are
best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s
a
sudden stop or crash.
Lap
Belt
Cinch
Feature
If
you do not want the lap belt to move freely, pull the
lap belt out all the way to set the lock. To permit the lap
belt to move freely again, unbuckle the belt, let it retract
all the way, and buckle up again.
@
What’s wrong with this?
A:
The shoulder belt
is
too loose. It
won’t
give nearly
as much protection this
way.
You
can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose.
In
a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt should fit against your body.
1-13
@'
What's wrong with this?
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
!
A:
The
belt
is
buckled
in
the
wrong
place.
You
can
be seriously injured
if'
your belt
is
buckled
in the wrong place like this.
In
a crash, the belt
would
go
up over your abdomen. The belt forces
would be there, not at the pelvic bones.
This
could
cause serious internal injuries. Always buckle your
belt into the buckle nearest you.
Qt
What’s wrong with this?
~
You can be seriously injured
if
you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In
a
crash, your
body
would move
too
far
forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the
ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure internal organs
like your liver or spleen.
A:
The shoulder belt is
worn
under the
arm.
It
should
be
worn
over the shoulder at all times.
1-15
@
What’s wrong with this?
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In
a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of the
belt to spread impact forces. If a belt
is
twisted,
make it straight
so
it can work properly, or ask
your dealer to
fix
it.
A:
The belt
is
twisted
across
the
body.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the
belt and your vehicle.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.
A
pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below
the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-17
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt
is
worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Passenger
Position
To learn how
to
wear the passenger’s safety belt
properly, see “Driver Position’’ earlier in this section.
The passenger’s safety belt works the same way
as
the
driver’s safety belt
--
except for one thing.
If
you ever pull
the lap portion of the belt out
all
the way, you will engage
the child restraint locking feature.
If
this
happens, just let
the belt
go
back
all
the way and
start
again.
Air Bag System
This part explains the air bag system.
Your vehicle has two air bags
--
one air bag for the
driver and another air bag for the passenger.
Here are the most important things to know about the air
bag system:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if
you aren’t wearing your safety belt
--
even if you
have
air
bags. Wearing your safety belt during
a
crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things
inside the vehicle or being ejected from it.
Air
bags are “supplemental restraints” to the safety
belts. All air bags are designed to work with
safety belts, but don’t replace them. Air bags are
designed to work only in moderate to severe
crashes where the front of your vehicle hits
something. They aren’t designed to inflate at all
in rollover, rear, side or low-speed frontal
crashes. Everyone in your vehicle should wear a
safety belt properly
--
whether or not there’s an
air bag for that person.
Air
bags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye.
If
you’re too close to an inflating
air bag, it could seriously injure you. Safety belts
help keep you in position before and during a
crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with air
bags. The driver should
sit
as
far
back as possible
while still maintaining control of the vehicle.
Children who are up against, or very close to, an
air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed.
Air
bags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
the best protection for adults and older children,
but not for young children and infants. Neither
the vehicle’s safety belt system nor
its
air
bag
system
is
designed for them. Young children and
infants need the protection that a child restraint
system can provide. Always secure children
properly in your vehicle. To read how, see the
part of this manual called “Children” and see the
caution labels
on
the sunvisors and the
passenger’s safety belt.
1-19
There is an air bag readiness
light on the instrument
panel, which shows the air
bag symbol.
The system checks the air bag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See
“Air
Bag Readiness Light” in the Index
for more information.
How
the
Air Bag
System
Works
Where are the air bags?
The driver’s
air
bag is
in
the middle of the steering wheel.
1-20
The passenger’s air bag is in the instrument panel
on
the
passenger’s side.
A
CAUTION:
If
something is between an occupant and an air
bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person. The path
of an inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t
put anything between an occupant and an air
bag, and don’t attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on
or
near any other air
bag covering.
1-21
When should an air bag inflate?
An air bag is designed to inflate in a moderate to severe
frontal or near-frontal crash. The
air
bag will inflate
only
if
the impact speed is above the system’s designed
“threshold level.” If your vehicle goes straight into a
wall that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level is
about
9
to
15
mph
(14
to
24
km/h).
The threshold level
can vary, however, with specific vehicle design,
so
that
it can be somewhat above or below this range.
If
your
vehicle strikes something that will move or deform, such
as a parked car, the threshold level will be higher. The
air bag is not designed to inflate in rollovers, side
impacts or rear impacts, because inflation would not
help the occupant.
It
is
possible that in a crash only one of the
two
air
bags in
your
Corvette will deploy.
This
is rare, but can happen in a
crash just severe enough to make an
air
bag inflate.
In
any particular crash, no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because
of
the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and
how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal or
near-frontal impacts.
What makes an air bag inflate?
In
an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in
a
crash. The sensing
system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which
inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related
hardware are all part
of
the air bag modules inside the
steering wheel and in the instrument panel in front of
the passenger.
How
does an air bag restrain?
In
moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact
the
steering wheel or the
instrument panel.
Air
bags supplement the protection
provided by safety belts.
Air
bags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. But
air
bags would
not help you
in
many types of collisions, including
rollovers, rear impacts and side impacts, primarily because
an
occupant’s motion is not toward those
air
bags.
Air
bags should never be regarded as anything more
than
a
supplement to safety belts,
and
then only in moderate to
severe fi-ontal or near-frontal collisions.
1-22
What will you see after an air bag inflates?
After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates,
so
quickly
that some people may not even realize the air bag
inflated. Some components of the air bag module
--
the
steering wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, or the
instrument panel for the passenger’s bag
--
will be hot
for a short time. The parts of the bag that come into
contact with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch.
There will be some smoke and dust coming from vents
in the deflated air bags. Air bag inflation doesn’t prevent
the driver from seeing or from being able to steer the
vehicle, nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.
When an air bag inflates, there
is
dust in the air.
This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out
as
soon as it is safe to do
so.
If you have breathing problems but can’t get out
of the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening
a
window or door.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from
the passenger air bag.
0
0
0
Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After they
inflate, you’ll need some new parts for your air bag
system. If you don’t get them, the air bag system
won’t be there to help protect you in another crash.
A
new system will include air bag modules
and
possibly other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle covers the need to replace other
parts.
Your vehicle is equipped with
a
diagnostic module,
which records information about the air bag system.
The module records information about the readiness
of the system, when the sensors are activated and
driver’s safety belt usage at deployment.
Let only qualified technicians work on your
air
bag system. Improper service can mean that your
air bag system won’t work properly. See your dealer
for service.
1-23
NOTICE:
If
you damage the covering for the driver’s or the
passenger’s air bag, the bag may not work
properly. You may have to replace the
air
bag
module in the steering wheel or both the
air
bag
module and the instrument panel for the
passenger’s air bag.
Do
not open or break the air
bag coverings.
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the air bag system in several places
around your vehicle. You don’t want the system to
inflate while someone is working on your vehicle. Your
dealer and the Corvette Service Manual have
information about servicing your vehicle and the air bag
system.
To
purchase a service manual, see “Service and
Owner Publications” in the Index.
For up to
10
minutes after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an air
bag can still inflate during improper service. You
can be injured
if
you are close to an air bag when
it
inflates. Avoid yellow wires, wires wrapped
with yellow tape or yellow connectors. They are
probably part of the air bag system. Be sure to
follow proper service procedures, and make sure
the person performing work for you is qualified
to do
so.
The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.
I
Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! That includes
infants and all children smaller than adult size. Neither
the distance to be traveled nor the age and size of the
traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use safety
restraints.
In
fact, the law in every state in the United
States and in
every
Canadian province says children up
to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Smaller Children and Babies
Children who are up against, or very close to, an
air bag when
it
inflates can be seriously injured
or killed.
Air
bags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
the best protection for adults and older children,
but not for young children and infants. Neither
the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bag
system is designed for them. Young children and
infants need the protection that a child restraint
system can provide. Always secure children
properly in your vehicle.
A
CAUTION:
A
very young child’s hip bones are
so
small that
a
regular belt might not stay low on the hips,
as
it
should. Instead, the belt will likely be over the
child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply
force right on the child’s abdomen, which could
cause serious or fatal injuries. Smaller children
and babies should always be restrained in a child
restraint. However, infants, who should be
restrained in
a
rear-facing child restraint, cannot
ride safely in this vehicle. The instructions for the
restraint will say whether it
is
the right type and
size for your child.
If
a forward-facing child
restraint is suitable for your child, be sure the
child is always properly restrained while riding in
this vehicle.
1-25
Infants need complete support, including support for the
head and neck. This is necessary because an infant’s
neck is
weak
and its head weighs
so
much compared
with the rest of its body.
In
a crash, an infant in
a
rear-facing restraint settles into the restraint,
so
the crash
forces can be distributed across the strongest part of the
infant’s body, the back and shoulders.
A
baby should be
secured in
an
appropriate infant restraint, but you
shouldn’t secure that type of restraint in this vehicle
because
of
the air bag risk.
A
CAUTION:
I
Never hold a baby in your arms while riding in a
vehicle.
A
baby doesn’t weigh much
--
until a
crash. During a crash a baby will become
so
heavy you can’t hold it. For example, in
a
crash
at only
25
mph
(40
km/h),
a
12-lb.
(5.5
kg) baby
will suddenly become a 240-lb.
(110
kg) force
on
your arms. The baby would be almost impossible
to hold.
Child Restraints
Every time infants and young children ride in
vehicles, they should have protection provided by
appropriate restraints.
@
What are the different types of add-on child
A:
Add-on child restraints are available in four basic
types. When selecting a child restraint, take into
consideration not only the child’s weight and size,
but also whether or not the restraint will be
compatible with the motor vehicle in which it
will
be used.
restraints?
An
infant car bed
(A)
is
a special bed made for use
in a
motor
vehicle.
It’s
an infant restraint system
designed to restrain
or
position
a
child
an
a
continuous flat surface. With an infant
car
bed,
make sure that the infant’s head rests toward the
center
of
the vehicle.
1-27
A
rear-facing infant restraint
(B)
positions an infant
to face the rear of the vehicle. Rear-facing infant
restraints are designed for infants of up to about
20
lbs.
(9
kg) and about one year of age. This type
of restraint faces the rear
so
that the infant’s head,
neck and body can have the support they need in a
crash. Some infant seats come in two parts
--
the
base stays secured in the vehicle and the seat part
is removable.
1-28
A
forward-facing child restraint
(C-E)
positions a
child upright
to
face forward in the vehicle. These
forward-facing restraints are designed to help protect
children
who
are
from
20 to
40
lbs.
(9
to
18
kg)
and
about 26 to
40
inches (66 to 102 cm) in height, or up
to
around four years of age. One type, a convertible
restraint,
is
designed
to
be
used
either as a rear-facing
infant seat
or
a
forward-facing child seat.
1-29
A
booster seat
(F,
G)
is designed for children who
are
about
40
to
60
lbs.
(1
8
to
27
kg) and about
four to eight years
of
age. It’s designed to improve
the fit
of
the vehicle’s safety belt system. Booster
seats with shields use lap-only belts; however,
booster seats without shields use lap-shoulder
belts. Booster seats can also help a child to see
out the window.
1-30
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle.
If
it is, it
will have a label saying that it meets Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in
your
vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within
the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury.
The instructions that come with the child restraint will
show you how to do that. Both the owner’s manual and
the child restraint instructions are important,
so
if either
one
of
these is not available, obtain a replacement copy
from the manufacturer.
The child restraint must be secured properly in the
passenger seat.
Keep in mind that
an
unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in
the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle
--
even when no child is in it.
Top
Strap
Some child restraints have a top strap. Don’t use a
restraint like that in your vehicle because the top strap
anchor cannot be installed properly. You shouldn’t
use this type of child restraint without anchoring the
top strap.
1-31
Securing
a
Child Restraint in the Passenger
Seat Position
Your vehicle has a passenger air bag.
Never
put
a
rear-facing child restraint in this vehicle. Here’s why:
A
child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured if the passenger’s air bag
inflates. This is because the back of a rear-facing
child restraint would be very close to the inflating
air bag.
Do
not use a rear-facing child restraint in
this vehicle.
If’
a forward-facing child restraint is suitable for
your child, always move the passenger seat as far
back
as
it
will
go.
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part
about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure
to follow the instructions that came with the child
restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and
as the instructions say.
1.
Because your vehicle has a passenger air bag, always
move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing a forward-facing child restraint. (See
“Seats” in the Index.)
2.
Put the restraint on the seat.
3.
Pick
up
the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through
or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If
the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or
neck, put it behind the child restraint.
4.
Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button
is
positioned so you would be able
to
unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5.
Pull the rest of the lap belt all the
way
out of the
retractor to set the lock.
1-33
6.
7.
To
tighten the belt,
feed
the lap belt back into the
retractor while you push down on the child restraint.
You
may find it helpful to use your knee to push
down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
Push
and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle's
safety belt and let it
go
back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
Larger
Children
Children who have outgrown chld restraints should
wear the vehicle's safety belts.
Children who aren't buckled up can be thrown out in
a crash.
Children who aren't buckled up can strike other
people who are.
1-34
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt. The
belt can't properly spread the impact forces. In a
crash, the two children can be crushed together
and seriously injured.
A
belt must be used by
only one person at a time.
What
if
a
child
is
wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is
so
small that the shoulder belt is
very close to the child's face or neck?
A:
Move the child toward the center
of
the vehicle, but
be sure that the shoulder belt still is
on
the child's
shoulder,
so
that in a crash the child's upper body
would have the restraint that belts provide.
1-35
/A
CAUTION:
I
Never do this.
Here
a
child
is
sitting in a seat that has
a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part
is
behind
the child.
If
the child wears the belt in this way,
il
a
crash the child might slide under the belt. The
belt’s force would then be applied right on the
child’s abdomen. That could cause serious or
fatal injuries.
The lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug
on the hips, just touching the child’s thighs. This applies
belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your
dealer will order you
an
extender. It’s free. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear,
so
the
extender will be long enough for you. The extender will
be just for you, and just for the seat in your vehicle that
you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use it
only for the seat it
is
made to fit. To wear it, just attach it
to the regular safety belt.
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and
anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts.
If
you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from
doing its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.
If
a belt is
torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
8
C!,
1-37
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
If
you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts?
After
a
very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But
if
the belts were stretched, as they would be if
worn
during a more severe crash, then you need new belts.
If
you ever see a label on the driver’s or passenger’s
safety belt that says to replace the belt, be sure to do so.
Then the new belt will be there to help protect you in a
collision.
You
would see this label on the belt near the
latch plate.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt
or
seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs
may be necessary even if the belt wasn’t being used at
the time of the collision.
If
an
air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag
system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier in
this section.
Section
2
Features and Controls
Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle, and information on starting,
shifting and braking. Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you
if
everything is
working properly
--
and what to
do
if you have a problem.
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-
14
2- 17
2-18
2-20
2-2 1
2-22
2-24
2-26
2-29
2-32
2-34
2-36
2-36
Door Locks
Memory (Option)
Remote Function Actuation System
Remote Hatch/Trunk Lid Release
Universal Theft-Deterrent System
PASS-Key@
New Vehicle “Break-In”
Ignition Switch
Starting Your Engine
Engine Coolant Heater (Canada Only)
Automatic Transmission Operation
Manual Transmission Operation
Parking Brake
Shifting Into PARK (P)
(Automatic Transmission Models Only)
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
(Automatic Transmission)
Parking Your Vehicle (Manual Transmission)
2-37
2-37
2-38
2-39
2-39
2-40
2-42
2-50
2-52
2-53
2-54
2-60
2-68
2-74
2-77
2-87
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
Running Your Engine While You’re Parked
(Automatic Transmission)
Limited-Slip Rear Axle
Selective Real Time Damping (Option)
Windows
Turn
SignalMultifunction Lever
Exterior Lamps
Interior Lamps
Mirrors
Storage Compartments
Roof Panel (Coupe)
Convertible Top (Option)
Instrument Panel
Warning Lights, Gages and Messages
Driver Information Center (DIC)
2-1
Keys
I
A
CAUTION:
Leaving young children in a vehicle with the
ignition key
is
dangerous for many reasons.
A
child or others could be badly injured or
even killed.
They could operate power windows or other
controls
or
even make the vehicle move. Don’t
leave the keys in a vehicle with young children.
One key is used for the
ignition, the doors and
all
other locks.
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer gives the
first owner a key and a bar coded tag. Both the key and
the tag are attached to
a
key ring.
The heavy paper tag has a code on it that tells your
dealer
or
a qualified locksmith how to make extra keys.
Keep the bar-coded tag in a safe place. If you lose your
key, you’ll be able to have a new one made easily using
this tag. If your key doesn’t have a tag and
you
need a
new ignition key, go to your Chevrolet dealer for the
correct key code.
If you ever do get locked out
of
your vehicle, call the
Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Center at
1-800-CHEV-USA. (Canadian customers call
1-800-268-2800.)
NOTICE:
Your vehicle has a number
of
features that can
help prevent theft. But you can have a lot of
trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock
your key inside. You may even have to damage
your vehicle to get in.
So
be sure you have an
extra key.
2-3
Door
Locks
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
Passengers
--
especially children
--
can easily
open the doors and fall out. When a door
is
locked, the inside handle won’t open it.
Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked
door when you
slow
down or stop your vehicle.
This may not be
so
obvious: You increase the
chance
of
being thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash
if
the doors aren’t locked. Wear safety belts
properly, lock your doors, and you will be
far
better off whenever you drive your vehicle.
There
are
several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
From the outside, use your door key or the key
fob transmitter.
If
your theft-deterrent system is armed, unlock the doors
only with the key or the transmitter to avoid setting off
the alarm. See “Universal Theft-Deterrent” in the Index.
To lock the door from the inside, move the lock control
on the door forward. To unlock it, move the lock control
on the door backward.
Power Door Locks
Press the power door unlocWlock switch on either door
to lock or unlock both doors at once.
Leaving Your Vehicle
If
you
are leaving the vehicle, take your key, open your
door and set the locks from inside. Then get out and
close the door.
Your vehicle has a Remote Function Actuator, or key
fob transmitter function that can also lock your vehicle
as you walk away from it. See “Remote Function
Actuation System’’ in
the
Index.
Memory
(Option)
MEMORY can store and recall the vehicle settings for
the driver’s seat position, the outside rearview mirror
position, comfort control temperature, fan speed and
mode settings, radio presets, tone, volume, playback
mode (AMEM, Tape or
CD),
last displayed station,
compact disc position and audio tape direction.
2-5
The MEMORY buttons are located on the driver’s side
door, above the power mirror buttons. The MEMORY
buttons can store and recall the vehicle settings for up to
three drivers. Use button
“1”
to store the vehicle settings
for the first driver, button
“2”
for a second driver or
press buttons
1
and 2 simultaneously for a third driver.
To store your vehicle settings, press and hold a
MEMORY button. The light will glow steady for one
second and then flash once when the settings
are completed.
To recall your settings, press your MEMORY button.
The light above the button will flash until the correct
vehicle settings are achieved, then glow for three
seconds when completed.
Your memory settings will also be recalled when you
press the active door
UNLOCK
button on the key
fob transmitter.
Drivers 1,2 and
3
correspond to the order in which your
key fob transmitters were programmed. (See “Fob
Training” in the Index.)
Memory recall
will
not work
if
the vehicle is moving,
the ignition key is removed or a power seat, mirror or
memory switch is being used. Memory recall will be
temporarily interrupted during engine crank.
Remote Function Actuation System
Your vehicle has a passive/active Remote Function
Actuation (RFA) system that allows you to lock and
unlock your doors, unlock your hatch/trunk lid, turn the
panic alarm on and off and disarm or
arm
your
theft-deterrent system. When using one of the key fob
transmitters supplied with your vehicle, the passive
range distance is as much as
30
feet
(9
m) away from the
vehicle on the driver’s side and 20 feet
(6
m) away on
the passenger’s side. The active range distance is as
much as
100
feet
(30
m) away.
Your vehicle comes
standard with two
transmitters, and up to
three can be matched
to your vehlcle.
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” later in
this section.
Your
RFA
system operates on a radio frequency subject
to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules
and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part
15
of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1)
this device may not cause harmful interference,
and
(2)
this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1)
this device may not cause interference, and
(2)
this
device must accept
any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than an
authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
If you ever notice a decrease in the key fob transmitter
range, try doing one of the following:
0
0
0
0
0
0
Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See the instructions that follow.
Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy
or
snowy weather.
Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or
right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try
again.
Check to make sure that an electronic device
such as a cellular phone or lap top computer is not
causing interference.
Try to resynchronize the transmitter by pressing
and
holding the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons for
seven seconds when standing next to the vehicle.
If
you’re still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
2-7
Operation
You
don’t have to do anything for the
RFA
to work
when the passive feature is on.
You
can turn on the passive feature by moving the
transmitter’s slider switch to
ON.
Now, when you move
toward your vehicle with the key fob transmitter, the
system will automatically disarm your theft-deterrent
system and unlock the driver’s door or both depending
on how the system is programmed. If it’s dark enough
outside,
your
interior lamps will come on.
You
can also use the buttons on the transmitter to
actively unlock your vehicle. Press UNLOCK once to
unlock the driver’s door, or press UNLOCK again
within 10 seconds to unlock both doors.
The hatchltrunk lid will unlock when the button with the
trunk
symbol is pressed, as long as the ignition is turned
to the
OFF
position.
If you move out of range with the slider switch set to
ON, the key fob transmitter will:
Lock the doors after five seconds.
0
Arm
the theft-deterrent system.
Sound the horn to let you know the doors are locked
(if you have set your options to
do
so).
(See “Driver
Information Center Controls and Displays” in
the Index.)
0
Turn
off
the interior lamps.
The system has a feature that makes it difficult for you
to lock your keys in your vehicle.
If
you leave your keys
in
the
ignition
and attempt to lock the doors, the vehicle
will not lock and a chime will sound to remind you that
the keys are in the ignition.
If
the door lock is pressed
again, within five seconds, the doors will lock and the
keys can be locked in the car. If you leave the keys
in
the
ignition
and move away with the key fob transmitter,
the doors still will not lock. You should notice that the
horn doesn’t sound and return to get your keys out of
the ignition.
The system will allow you to lock your keys in the
vehicle if you didn’t leave them in the ignition. You
should, however, be able to use the key fob transmitter
to get them out as long as the passive slide switch
is
in
the
ON
position. After
15
seconds of no motion, the key
fob transmitter shuts down to save the battery. Wait
about
30
seconds, then rock the vehicle. The key fob
transmitter should “wake up” and unlock the doors.
This system can’t guarantee that you will never be
locked out of your vehicle. If the battery is low or if the
key fob transmitter is in a place where the signal can’t
get to the antenna,
it
won’t unlock the doors. Always
remember to take your keys with you.
Panic
Alarm
Button
When you press the special horn button
on
the key
fob transmitter, your vehicle’s horn will sound. This
panic alarm button will allow you to attract attention,
if needed.
If the horn alarm sounds, there are three ways to turn
it off:
Push the panic alarm button on the key fob
Wait
90
seconds, and the horn will turn
off
by
transmitter again.
itself or
0
Turn the key to any position in the ignition switch,
except
OFT.
RF’A
Settings
You can adjust the settings on the system through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). You can have just the
driver’s or both door locks passively unlock, change the
type of alarm used by the theft-deterrent, or have lamps
come on when you approach the vehicle. See “Driver
Information Center Controls and Displays” in the Index.
2-9
I’urning the Passive System
Off
You can disable the passive feature by moving the
transmitter’s slider switch to
OFF.
The vehicle will no
longer automatically disarm your theft-deterrent system
or unlock the doors, however, you will be able to
actively control use of the door locks, the hatch/trunk lid
release and the panic alarm using the four transmitter
buttons. (These buttons also work when the passive
feature is on.)
Make sure to fully slide the switch to either side when
turning the key fob transmitter on and
off.
You should
feel a double click when sliding the switch back
and forth.
You
can
also
check whether the passive system is on or
off
by closing the door and moving away from the
vehicle with the keys and transmitter. If the doors lock,
the passive system is on.
If you are working around your vehicle and keeping
your keys with you, you might want to
turn
the
RFA
passive system
off.
If you don’t, the transmitter will
keep locking and unlocking your doors.
Transmitter Range
The active range (using one of the four buttons)
of
the
key fob transmitter
is
approximately
60
to
100
feet
(18
to
30
m). The passive range (having the slider
switch set to
ON)
is approximately
10
to
20
feet
(3
to
6
m) on the passenger’s side of the vehicle and
20
to
30
feet
(6
to
9
m) on the driver’s side.
Resynchronizing Your Transmitter
Your
RFA
system uses a continually changing code for
increased security. Normally, the receiver in your
vehicle will keep track of this changing code.
,If
your
vehicle does not respond to your transmitter, do the
following to determine what’s wrong:
1.
Get closer to the vehicle and try pressing a button
again. Your battery may be low (If
so,
see “Battery
Replacement” in the Index).
2.
While standing close to your vehicle, press the
LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on your transmitter at
the same time and hold
for
seven seconds. This will
attempt to resynchronize
the
security code in your
RFA
key fob transmitter.
3.
When resynchronization is achieved, the horn
will chirp.
Loss
of synchronization will occur after transmitter
battery replacement or disconnection of the
vehicle’s battery.
If
attempts to resynchronize your transmitter to the
vehicle are not successful, you may need
to
match the
transmitter to the vehicle.
Matching Transmitter(s) To Your Vehicle
Each key fob transmitter is coded to prevent another
transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If
a transmitter
is lost or stolen,
a
replacement can be purchased through
your dealer. Remember to bring any remaining
transmitters with you when you go to your dealer. When
the dealer matches the replacement transmitter to your
vehicle, any remaining transmitters must also be
matched. Once your dealer has coded the new
transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your
vehicle. Each vehicle can have only three transmitters
matched to it.
To
match transmitters to your vehicle:
1.
Turn the ignition key to the
ON
position.
2.
Clear any warning messages on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) by pressing the
RESET button.
3.
Press the OPTIONS button on the DIC several times
until the blank page is displayed, then press and hold
the RESET button for two seconds.
2-11
4.
When the message
FOB
TRAINING is displayed,
push the RESET button once. The message
HOLD
LK
+
UNLK 1ST
FOB
will be displayed.
5.
Press and hold the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on
the transmitter simultaneously for
15
seconds.
6.
When a transmitter is learned, the
DIC
will display
FOB
LEARNED and then prompt you to learn the
next transmitter.
7.
Repeat Steps
5
and
6
for each additional transmitter.
8.
Remove the key from the ignition.
The programming mode will shut
off
if
0
You
don’t program any transmitters for two minutes.
0
You
take the key out
of
the ignition.
0
You
have programmed three transmitters.
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery
in
your key fob
transmitter should last about
18
months.
You
can tell the battery
is
weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range
in
any location. If you have to
get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change the battery.
NOTICE:
When replacing the battery, use care not to touch
any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage
the transmitter.
2-12
Replacing Your Battery
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Insert a coin into the slot on the back of the
transmitter and gently pry apart the front and back.
Gently pull the battery out
of
the transmitter.
Put the new battery in the transmitter, positive
(+)
side
up.
Use a battery, type CR2450, or equivalent.
Reassemble the transmitter in the order shown. Make
sure to put it together in the correct order
so
water
won’t get in.
Resynchronize the transmitter. (See
“Resynchronizing Your Transmitter” under Remote
Function Actuation System in the Index.)
Test the transmitter.
2-13
Remote Hatch/Trunk
Lid
Release
To
use the remote hatcWtrunk lid release on automatic
transmission vehicles, your vehicle must be in PARK (P)
or NUETRAL
(N).
For manual transmissions, set the
parking brake. See “Parking Brake” in the Index.
Press the button with the trunk symbol on it, located
at the left side of the steering column
on
the
instrument panel, to release the hatchhunk lid
from inside your vehicle.
The key fob transmitter will also release the
hatcWtrunk lid. See “Remote Function Actuation
System” in the Index.
If your vehicle
is
equipped with a hatch and you have
lost battery power, use the manual release cables to
open the hatch.
To
access the cables, remove the
two
access panels located
in
the rear
of
the trunk area.
There is one cable located underneath each access
panel. (See “Storage Compartments” in the Index for
more information.)
Pull each cable straight down for each latch to release
the hatch.
2-14
If
your vehicle is equipped with a convertible top and
you have lost battery power, use the manual release
cable to open the trunk lid.
To
access the cable, remove
the center access panel located in the rear of the trunk
area. (See “Storage Compartments” in the Index
for
more information.)
Pull the cable straight down to release the trunk lid.
It can be dangerous to drive with the hatcldtrunk
lid open because carbon monoxide
(CO)
gas can
come into your vehicle. You can’t see or smell
CO.
It
can cause unconsciousness and even death.
If
you must drive with the hatcWtrunk lid open
or if electrical wiring or other cable connections
must pass through the seal between the body and
the hatcldtrunk lid:
Make sure all windows are shut.
Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to
its
highest speed with the setting
on BI-LEVEL or VENT. That will force
outside air into your vehicle. See “Comfort
Controls” in the Index.
instrument panel, open them all the way.
0
If
you have
air
outlets on or under the
See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.
2-15
NOTICE:
If
you put things in the hatcldtrunk area, be sure
they won’t break the glass when you close it.
Never slam the hatcldtrunk lid down. You could
break the glass or damage the defogger grid.
When you close the hatchhrunk lid, make sure
you pull down from the center, not the sides.
If
you pull the hatcldtrunk lid down from the side
too often, the weatherstrip can be damaged.
NOTICE:
Do
not store heavy or sharp objects in the three
storage compartments located in the hatcldtrunk
area.
If
you do, the objects could damage
the underbody.
Theft
Vehicle theft is big business, especially
in
some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we
know
that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal. However,
there
are ways you
can
help.
Key in the Ignition
If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an
easy target for joy riders or professional thieves
--
so
don’t
do
it.
When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s door,
you’ll hear a tone reminding you to remove your key
from the ignition and take it with you. Always do this.
Your steering wheel will be locked, and
so
will
your
ignition.
If
you have
an
automatic transmission, taking
your key out also locks your transmission. And
remember to lock the doors.
Parking at Night
Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock your
vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables out of sight.
Put
them in a storage area, or take them with you.
Parking Lots
If you park in
a
lot where someone will be watching
your vehicle, it’s best to lock
it
up and take your keys.
But what if you have to leave your key?
Do
not leave
valuables in your vehicle, since there would be no place
to secure them.
”<
Universal Theft-Deterrent System
Your Corvette has a
theft-deterrent alarm
I
SECURITY
system. With
this
system,
the SECURITY light will
flash as you open the door
(if your ignition is
off).
This light reminds you to
arrn
the theft-deterrent system.
To
arm
the system, do the following:
To arm the system, do the following:
1.
Press the LOCK button on the key fob transmitter, as
mentioned earlier, OR
2.
Walk out of range with the passive switch on
OR
3.
Open the door. (The SECURITY light should flash.)
Lock the door with the power door lock switch. The
SECURITY light will stop flashing and stay on.
Close all the doors. The SECURITY light should
go off.
Now,
if
a door or the hatcWtmnk lid is opened without
the key or the key fob transmitter system, the alarm will
go
off.
Your
horn
will sound for two minutes, then it
will
go
off
to save battery power. And, your vehicle
won’t start.
The theft-deterrent system won’t arm
if
you lock the
doors with a key, the manual door
lock,
or if you power
lock (from the inside) the vehicle after the doors
are closed.
If
your passenger stays in the vehicle when you leave
with the keys, have the passenger lock the vehicle after
the doors are closed. This way the alarm won’t
arm,
and
your passenger won’t set it
off.
2- 17
Always use your key or the key fob transmitter to
unlock a door. Unlocking a door any other way will set
off
the alarm.
If
you do set
off
the alarm, there
are
four
ways to stop it:
Unlock any door with your key.
Put the key in the ignition.
Press the UNLOCK button on the key fob transmitter.
0
Walk into range with the passive switch on.
Testing the
Alarm
1.
Make sure the rear hatch/trunk lid is latched.
2.
Lower a window on the door.
3.
Manually arm the system with the power door
lock switch.
4.
Close the doors and wait
15
seconds.
PASS-Key@
Your vehicle is equipped
with the PASS-Key
(Personalized Automotive
Security System)
theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key is
a
passive
theft-deterrent system. It
works when you insert
or
remove the key from
the ignition.
PASS-Key uses a resistor pellet in the ignition key that
matches
a
decoder in your vehicle.
5.
Reach through the open window and press the power
unlock button. Now open the door. The alarm
should sound.
6.
Turn off the alarm.
If
the alarm
is
inoperative, check to see
if
the horn
works. If not, check the horn fuse. See “Fuses and
Circuit Breakers” in the Index.
If
the horn works, but the
alarm doesn’t go
off,
see your dealer.
2-18
When the PASS-Key system senses that someone is
using the wrong key, it shuts down the vehicle’s starter
and fuel systems. For about three minutes, the starter
won’t work and fuel won’t go to the engine.
If
someone
tries to start your vehicle again or uses another key
during this time, the shutdown period will start over
again. This discourages someone from randomly trying
different keys with different resistor pellets in an attempt
to make a match.
The key must be clean and dry before it’s inserted in the
ignition or the engine may not start. If the SECURITY
light comes on, the key may be dirty or wet.
If this happens and the starter won’t work, turn the
ignition
off.
Clean and dry the key, wait three minutes
and try again. If the starter still won’t work, wait
three minutes and try the other ignition key. At this time,
you may also want to check the fuses (see “Fuses and
Circuit Breakers” in the Index). If the starter won’t work
with the other key, your vehicle needs service. If your
vehicle does start, the first ignition key may be faulty.
See your dealer or a locksmith who can service the
PASS-Key.
If you accidentally use a key that has a damaged or
missing resistor pellet, you will see no SECURITY
light. You don’t have to wait three minutes before trying
the proper key.
If the resistor pellet is damaged or missing, the starter
won’t work. Use the other ignition key, and see your
dealer or a locksmith who can service the PASS-Key to
have a new key made.
If the SECURITY light comes on while driving, have
your vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
If you lose or damage a PASS-Key ignition key, see
your dealer or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key.
In an emergency, call the Chevrolet Roadside Assistance
Center at 1-800-CHEV-USA
(1-800-243-8872).
In
Canada, call 1-800-268-6800.
2-19
New Vehicle “Break-In”
NOTICE:
Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate
“break-in.” But
it
will perform better in the long
run
if
you follow these guidelines:
0
Keep your speed
at
55
mph
(88
kmh) or
less for the
first
500
miles (805
km).
0
Don’t drive
at
any one speed
--
fast
or
slow
--
for the
first
500
miles
(805
km).
Don’t make full-throttle starts.
200
miles
(322
km)
or
so.
During this time
your new brake linings aren’t yet broken
in. Hard stops with new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake linings.
0
Avoid making hard stops for the
first
Ignition
Switch
With the key in the ignition switch, you can turn the
switch to
four
positions.
OFF:
The only position from which you can remove the
key. Removing the key locks your steering wheel,
ignition and automatic transmission.
If
you have an automatic transmission, the ignition
switch can’t be turned to
OFF
unless the shift lever is
in
PARK (P).
ACC:
The position in which you can operate your
electrical power accessories. With the key in this
position, the automatic transmission and steering
column will unlock.
ON:
The position to which the switch returns after you
start the engine and release the switch. The switch stays
in the
ON
position when the engine is running. But even
when the engine is not running, you can use
ON
to
operate your electrical power accessories and to display
some instrument panel messages and telltales.
START
Starts the engine. When the engine starts,
release the key. The ignition switch will return to
ON
for
normal driving.
When the engine is not running,
ACC
and
ON
allow you
to operate your electrical accessories, such as the radio.
A
warning tone will sound if you open the driver’s door
when the ignition is in
OFF
or
ACC
and the key
is
in
the ignition.
Removing the key from the ignition switch will
lock the steering column and result in a loss of
ability to steer the vehicle. This could cause a
collision.
If
you need to turn the engine
off
while
the vehicle
is
moving, turn the key to
ACC.
NOTICE:
If your key seems stuck in OFF and you can’t
turn
it,
be sure you are using the correct key;
if
so,
is
it all the way in? Turn the key only with
your hand. Using a tool to force
it
could break
the key or the ignition switch.
If
none of this
works, then your vehicle needs service.
2-21
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
With
RAP,
your power windows and the audio system
will continue to work for up to
15
minutes after the
ignition key is turned to
OFF
and neither door is opened.
If a door is opened, the audio system and power
windows will shut off.
Starting
Your
Engine
This
vehicle has a computer system that monitors engine
speed, throttle and pedal position, and records the
current status.
Automatic Transmission
Move your shift lever to PARK
(P)
or NEUTRAL
(N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position
--
that’s a
safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL
(N)
only.
NOTICE:
Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your Corvette is
moving.
If
you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
Manual Transmission
The gear selector should be in
NEUTRAL
(N).
Hold the
clutch pedal to the floor and start the engine. Your
vehicle won’t start if the clutch pedal is not all the way
down
--
that’s a safety feature.
Starting Your Engine
1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your
engine gets warm.
NOTICE:
Holding your key in START for longer than
15
seconds at
a
time will cause your battery to be
drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can
damage your starter motor.
2-22
2.
If
it doesn’t start within
10
seconds, push the
accelerator pedal
all
the way to the floor, while you
hold the ignition key in STmT. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and let up on the accelerator
pedal. Wait about
15
seconds between each
try
to help
avoid draining your battery or damaging your starter.
When starting your engine in very cold weather (below
0°F
or
-18”C),
do this:
1.
With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START and hold it there. When the
engine starts, let go of the key. Use the accelerator
pedal to maintain engine speed,
if
you have to, until
your engine has run for a while.
2.
If
your engine still won’t start (or starts but then
stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try
pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again, do the same thing, but
this time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds.
This clears the extra gasoline from the engine.
NOTICE:
Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle.
If
you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way
the engine operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t,
your engine might not perform properly.
If you ever have to have your vehicle towed, see
the part of this manual that tells how to do it
without damaging your vehicle. See “Towing
Your Vehicle” in the Index.
Starter Interlock Feature
For your convenience and to avoid damage to your
starter, your vehicle is equipped with a starter interlock
feature. This feature will not allow you to crank the
engine when the vehicle is already running.
2-23
Racing or Other Competitive Driving
See
your Warranty
Book
before using your vehicle for
racing
or
other competitive driving.
NOTICE:
If
you use your vehicle for racing or other
competitive driving, your engine may use more
oil than
it
would with normal use.
Low
oil levels
can damage the engine. Be sure to check the oil
level often during racing or other competitive
driving and keep the level at or near the upper
mark on the engine
oil
dipstick. You may need to
add oil. See “Adding Oil” under “Engine” in
the Index.
Engine Coolant Heater
(Canada Only)
The engine coolant heater is located on the driver’s side
of the engine under the manifold. The electrical cord is
attached to the generator bracket assembly, between the
generator and the windshield washer fluid tank.
In very cold weather,
0
OF
(-
18
O
C)
or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You’ll get easier starting and
better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually,
the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of
four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
2-24
To
Use the
Engine
Coolant Heater
1.
Turn
off
the engine.
2.
Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. With
headlamps closed, route the cord in the opening
between the left hand headlamp door and the fender
panel.
Do
not pinch the cord when closing the hood.
3.
Plug it into a normal, grounded
1
10-volt
AC
outlet.
A
CAUTIO
I
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could overheat and cause
a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the
cord into
a
properly grounded three-prong
110-volt
AC
outlet.
If
the cord won’t reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for
at least
15
amps.
4.
Before starting the engine,
be
sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away from
moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could
be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of
trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that
particular area.
~
--
2-25
Automatic Transmission Operation
There
are
several different positions for your shift lever.
PARK
(P):
This
locks
your rear wheels.
It’s
the best
position to use when you
start
your engine because your
vehicle can’t move easily.
c
I
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if
the
shift lever is not fully in
PARK
(P)
with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to.
If
you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured.
To
be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever to
PARK (P).
See “Shifting Into
PARK (P)”
in the Index.
Be sure the shift lever is fully in PARK
(P)
range
before starting the engine. Your vehicle has a
brake-transmission shift interlock. You have to fully
apply your regular brakes before you can shift from
PARK
(P)
when the ignition key
is
in the
ON
position. If
you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the
shift lever
--
push the shift lever all the way into
PARK
(P)
and release the shift lever button as you
maintain brake application. Then press the shift lever
button and move the shift lever into the gear you wish.
(If you do not apply the brake after
15
seconds once the
ignition is turned on, you will receive a
PRESS
BRAKE
BEFORE
SHIFT
message in the Driver Information
Center.) See “Shifting Out
of
PARK (P)” in the Index.
REVERSE
(R):
Use this gear to back up.
I
1
I
NOTICE:
r
Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is
moving forward could damage your
transmission. Shift to REVERSE (R) only
after your vehicle is stopped.
To
rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transmission,
see
“Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index.
NEUTRAL (N):
In this position, your engine
doesn’t connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re
already moving, use NEUTRAL
(N)
only. Also, use
NEUTRAL
(N)
when your vehicle is being towed.
Shifting out of PARK
(P)
or NEUTRAL
(N)
while
your engine is “racing” (running at high speed)
is
dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the
brake pedal, your vehicle could move very
rapidly. You could lose control and hit people or
objects. Don’t shift out
of
PARK
(P)
or
NEUTRAL
(N)
while your engine
is
racing.
2-27
NOTICE:
Damage to your transmission caused by shifting
out
of
PARK
(P)
or NEUTRAL
(N)
with the
engine racing isn’t covered by your warranty.
1
AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE
(0):
This position is for
normal driving.
THIRD
(3):
This position is also used for normal
driving, however, it offers more power and lower fuel
economy
than
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE
(0).
Here
are
some times you might choose THIRD
(3)
instead
of
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE
(a):
0
When driving on hilly, winding roads.
0
When going down a steep hill.
SECOND
(2):
This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND
(2)
on hills.
It can help control your speed as you go down steep
mountain roads, but then you would also want to use
your brakes off and on.
FIRST
(1):
This position gives you even more power
(but lower fuel economy) than SECOND
(2).
You
can
use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow
or
mud. If the
selector lever is put in FIRST
(l),
the transmission
won’t shift into first gear until the vehicle is going
slowly enough.
NOTICE:
If
your rear wheels can’t rotate, don’t try to
drive. This might happen if you were stuck in
very deep sand
or
mud or were up against a solid
object.
You
could damage your transmission.
Also,
if
you stop when going uphill, don’t hold
your vehicle there with only the accelerator
pedal. This could overheat and damage the
transmission. Use your brakes or shift into
PARK (P) to hold your vehicle in position on
a hill.
Maximum engine speed is limited to protect driveline
components from improper operation.
Manual Transmission Operation
6-Speed
1
3
5
R
2
4
6
This is your shift pattern.
Here’s how to operate
your transmission:
FIRST
(1):
Press the clutch pedal and shift into
FIRST
(1).
Then slowly let up on the clutch pedal as
you press the accelerator pedal.
You can shift into
FIRST
(1)
when you’re going less
than 40 mph
(64
km/h).
If
you’ve come to a complete
stop and it’s hard to shift into FIRST
(l),
put the shift
lever in NEUTRAL
(N)
and let up on the clutch. Press
the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST
(1).
SECOND
(2):
Press the clutch pedal as you let up on
the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND
(2).
Then,
slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
THIRD
(3),
FOURTH
(4),
FIFTH
(5)
AND
SIXTH
(6):
Shift into THIRD
(3),
FOURTH
(4),
FIFTH
(5)
and
SIXTH
(6)
the same way you do for SECOND
(2).
Slowly let up on the clutch pedal
as
you press the
accelerator pedal.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the
brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press the
clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to
NEUTRAL
(N).
NEUTRAL (N):
Use this position when you start or idle
your engine. Your shift lever is in NEUTRAL (N) when
it is centered in the shift pattern, not in any other gear.
REVERSE
(R):
To back up, press down the clutch
pedal and shift into REVERSE (R). Just apply pressure
to get the lever past FIFTH
(5)
and
SIXTH
(6)
into
REVERSE
(R).
Let up on the clutch pedal slowly while
pressing the accelerator pedal.
Your six-speed manual transmission has a feature that
allows you
to
safely shift into REVERSE (R) while the
vehicle
is
rolling (at less than
5
mph
(8
km/h)).
You
will be locked out
if
you try to shft into REVERSE
(R)
while your vehicle is moving faster than
5
mph
(8
km/h).
If
you have turned your ignition off and wish
to park your car in REVERSE (R), you will have to
move the shift lever quickly to the right, and
immediately forward into gear.
2-29
Shift Speeds (Manual Transmission)
This chart shows when to shift to the next higher gear
for best fuel economy.
Manual Transmission Recommended
Shift Speeds in mph (kmih)
Engine
Engines
.Acceleration Shift Speed
If your engine speed drops below
900
rpm, or if the
engine is not running smoothly, you should downshift to
the next lower gear. You may have to downshift two
or
more gears to keep the engine running smoothly or for
good performance.
NOTICE:
When you are shifting gears, don't move the
gearshift lever around needlessly. This can
damage parts of the transmission and may
require costly repair. Shift directly into the next
appropriate gear.
One
to
Four
Light (Manual Transmission)
IT04
SHIFT
When this light comes on,
you
can
only shift from
F'IRST
(1)
to FOURTH
(4)
instead of FIRST
(1)
to
SECOND
(2).
You must
complete the shift into
FOURTH
(4)
to deactivate
this feature. This helps you
get the best possible
fuel economy.
After shifting
to
FOURTH
(4),
you may downshift to a
lower gear if you prefer.
2-30
NOTICE:
Do
not try to force the shift lever into
SECOND
(2)
or THIRD
(3)
when the
ONE
TO
FOUR light comes on.
Do
not
try
to re-engage
FIRST
(1)
after starting to shift into
FOURTH
(4).
You
will
damage your
transmission. Shift only from FIRST
(1)
to
FOURTH
(4)
when the light comes on.
This light will come on when:
0
The engine coolant temperature is higher than 120°F
0
You
are going 15 to 19 mph (24 to
31
km/h)
and
0
You
are at 21 percent throttle or less.
(49"C), and
Downshifting (Manual Transmission)
Do
not downshift into the gear shown below
at
a speed
greater than shown in the table:
FIRST (1)
....................
50
mph
(80
km/h)
SECOND
(2)
................
74 mph (1 19
km/h)
THIRD (3)
.................
101
mph (163
km/h)
FOURTH
(4)
...............
130 mph (209
km/h)
NOTICE:
If
you
skip
more than one gear when you
downshift, or
if
you race the engine when
you
downshift, you can damage the clutch, driveshaft
or
transmission.
2-31
The six-speed transmission has a spring that centers the
-
Parking Brake
shift lever near THIRD
(3)
and FOURTH
(4).
This
spring helps you know which gear you are
in
when you
are shifting. Be careful when shifting from FIRST
(1)
to
SECOND
(2)
or downshifting from SIXTH
(6)
to
FIFTH
(5).
The springs will try to pull the gearshift
lever toward FOURTH
(4)
and THIRD
(3).
Make sure
you move the lever into
SECOND
(2)
or FIFTH
(5).
If
you let the lever move in the direction of the pulling,
you may end up shifting from FIRST
(1)
to
FOURTH
(4)
or from SIXTH
(6)
to THIRD
(3).
..
If you
skip
more than one gear when you
downshift, you could lose control of your vehicle.
And you could injure yourself or others. Don’t
shift from
SIXTH
(6)
to THIRD
(3),
FIFTH
(5)
to
SECOND
(2)
or
FOURTH
(4) to FIRST
(1).
1
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down.
Pull the parking brake lever. This sets your parking
brake.
If
the ignition is on, the brake system warning
light will come on.
NOTICE:
Driving with the parking brake on can cause
your rear brakes to overheat. You may have to
replace them, and
you
could
also
damage other
parts of your vehicle. Make sure the brake
warning light is not on before driving.
To
release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down.
Hold the release button in as
you
move the brake lever
all the
way
down.
2-33
Shifting Into PARK (P)
(Automatic Transmission Only)
I
A
CAUTION:
I
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if
the shift lever is not fully in
PARK
(P)
with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
If
you have left the engine running,. the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To
be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when
you’re on fairly level ground, use the steps
that follow.
0
Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set
the parking brake.
Move the shift lever into the PARK (P) position by
holding in the button on the lever and pushing the
lever all the way toward the front of your vehicle.
0
Turn the ignition key to
OFF.
0
Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
remove the key from your ignition, your vehicle
is
in
PARK
(P).
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running (Automatic Transmission Only)
A
CAUTION:
I
It
can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the
engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever
is
not fully in PARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly set. And, if you
leave the vehicle with the engine running,
it
could
overheat and even catch fire. You
or
others could
be injured. Don’t leave your vehicle with the
engine running unless you have to.
Torque
Lock
(Automatic Transmission)
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”
To
prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat.
To
find out how, see “Shifting Into
PARK
(P)”
in the Index.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P)
before
you release the parking brake.
If
torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours
a
little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
so
you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
2-35
Shifting Out
of
PARK
(P)
(Automatic Transmission)
-
Your vehicle has a brake-transmission shift interlock.
You have to fully apply your regular brake before you
can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition is in the
ON
position.
See
“Automatic Transmission Operation” in
the Index.
As a prompt, you will see a message in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) that will say PRESS BRAKE
BEFORE
SHIFT
within
15
seconds unless the brake
is pressed.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever
--
push the shift lever all the way into
PARK
(P)
and release the shift lever button as you
maintain brake application. Then press the shift lever
button and move the shift lever into the gear you wish.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t
shift out of PARK (P), try this:
1.
Turn the key to the ACC position.
2.
Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step
4.
3.
Shift to NEUTRAL
(N).
4.
Start the engine and then shift to the drive gear
you want.
5.
Have your vehicle inspected by your dealer as soon
as possible.
Parking
Your
Vehicle
(Manual Transmission)
Before you get out of your vehicle, put your manual
transmission in REVERSE (R) and firmly apply the
parking brake.
2-36
Parking Over Things That Burn Engine Exhaust
I
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t park
over papers, leaves,
dry
grass or other things that
can burn.
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide
(CO),
which you can’t see
or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
Your exhaust system sounds strange
Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
Your vehicle was damaged in
a
collision.
Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over
road debris.
or different.
Repairs weren’t done correctly.
Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
If
you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
Drive
it
only with
all
the windows down to
Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
modified improperly.
blow out any
CO;
and
2-37
Running Your Engine While You’re
Parked (Automatic Transmission)
It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here
are
some things to know.
Idling the engine with the climate control system
off
could allow dangerous exhaust into your
vehicle (see the earlier Caution under
“Engine Exhaust”).
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even
if
the fan switch is at the highest setting. One place
this can happen is a garage. Exhaust
--
with
CO
--
can come in easily. NEVER park in a
garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be
a
blizzard. (See
“Blizzard” in the Index.)
It can be dangerous to get out
of
your vehicle
if
the shift lever
is
not fully in PARK
(P)
with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to.
If
you’ve left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured.
To
be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever to PARK
(P).
Follow the proper steps to
be
sure your vehicle won’t
move. See “Shifting Into
PARK
(P)”
in the Index.
Limited-Slip Rear Axle
Your limited-slip rear axle can give
you
additional
traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like
a standard axle most of the time, but when one of the
rear wheels has no traction and the other does, this
feature will allow the wheel with traction to move
the vehicle.
Selective Real Time Damping
(Option)
You may have a ride control system on your vehicle
called Selective Real Time Damping (SRTD). The
system provides the following performance benefits:
0
Reduced impact harshness
0
Improved road isolation
0
Improved high-speed stability
Improved handling response
This knob is on the center console. Turn it to select the
suspension characteristic of your choice.
TOUR:
Use for normal city and highway driving.
Provides a smooth, soft ride.
SPORT Use where road conditions or personal
preference demand more control. Provides more
“feel,”
or response to the road conditions.
2-39
PERF:
Use for performance driving. Provides a tight,
firm
ride and precise response to road conditions.
You can select a setting at any time. Based on road
conditions, steering wheel angle and your vehicle speed,
the system automatically adjusts to provide the best ride
and handling. Select a new setting whenever driving
conditions change.
There
are
three Driver Information Center messages that
are
displayed when a malfunction occurs with the SRTD
system. Refer to “Driver Information Center Warnings
and Messages’’ in the Index.
Windows
Power
Windows
With power windows, switches on the door control each
window when the ignition
is
on or when
RAP
is present.
(See “Retained Accessory Power” in the Index.)
Express-Down
Window
Both the driver’s and passenger’s window switches have
an express-down feature. Press AUTO and hold for less
than one-third of a second and release. The window will
lower completely. To stop express-down feature from
the lowering the window completely, simply press the
switch again.
You
can also open the window any amount by pressing
and releasing the switch.
Horn
To
sound the horn, press either horn symbol on your
steering wheel.
Tilt Wheel
A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel.
You can also raise it to the highest level to give your
legs more room when you exit and enter the vehicle.
To
tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever toward you. Move the steering wheel to a
comfortable level, then release the lever to lock the
wheel into place.
2-41
Turn SignaVMultifunction
Lever
The multifunction lever on the left side of the steering
column includes your:
0
Turn Signal and Lane Change Control
0
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
0
Cruise Control
Headlamps Switch
0
Flash-To-Pass
lbrn and Lane Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal
a
turn, move the multifunction lever all the
way up or down. When the
turn
is
finished, the lever
will return automatically.
A
chime will remind you if you leave your turn signal
on
for more than 3/4
of
a
mile (1.2
km)
of
driving.
01
A
green arrow on the
L
instrument cluster will flash
in the direction of the turn
or lane change.
To
signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold
it
there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by
itself when you release it.
2-42
As
you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows flash
faster than normal, a signal bulb may be burned out.
If
a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident.
If
the arrows don’t go on at all when you
signal a turn, check the fuses and check for burned-out
bulbs. (See “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index.)
Headlamps
The headlamp band controls these lamps:
Headlamps
0
Taillamps
Parking lamps
Sidemarker lamps
-
Eo
Turn the band to this symbol to turn on your
headlamps and other operating lamps.
<ooz
Turn the band to this symbol
to
turn on
your parking and other operating lamps without
your headlamps.
Turn
the band to
OFF
to turn
off
the lamps.
To
read your odometer with the ignition off, turn on
your parking lamps.
2-43
Headlamp Doors
The headlamp doors
are
designed to open when you turn
the headlamps on, and close when you turn the
headlamps and parking lamps off. If you turn the
headlamps on, then turn the headlamp switch back to the
parking lamps setting, the headlamp doors will
stay open.
You
can open the doors manually using the
knob
next to
the headlamp assembly. Turn the
knob
to the left until
the doors
are
open.
The headlamp doors should be open when driving in icy
or snowy conditions to prevent the doors from freezing
closed and when washing the vehicle to help clean
the headlamps.
NOTICE:
In order to avoid possible contact
of
the hood to
the headlamp doors, care should be taken in
raising the hood with the headlamps up, or shut
off
the lamps prior to opening the hood.
Lamps On Reminder
If you turn the ignition
off
and leave the headlamps or
parking lamps on and open the door, you will hear
a
chime.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To change the headlamps
signal lever all the
from low beam to high or
high to low, push the turn
-
-
way forward.
When the high beams are on, this light on the instrument
panel also will be
on.
To change the headlamps from
high to low, pull the lever rearward.
Flash-To-Pass
Momentarily pull the turn signal lever toward you. The
high-beam indicator will flash to indicate to the other
driver that you intend to pass. If the low-beam
headlamps are off and you have the optional fog lamps
on,
the fog lamps will flash.
Windshield Wipers
You can control the windshield wipers by moving the
lever with the wiper symbol
on
it. This lever is located
on the right side
of
your steering column.
For a single wiping cycle, push the lever down to MIST.
Hold it there until the wipers start, then let go. The
wipers will stop after one cycle. If you want more
cycles, hold the lever on MIST longer.
2-45
You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay
between wipes. This can be very useful in light rain or
snow. Push the lever up to INT (intermittent), then turn
the band, located on the lever, to adjust the delay time.
Rotate the band up for a shorter delay, down for a longer
delay. The wiper speed can only be adjusted when the
lever is in the INT position, not in HI or
LO.
For steady wiping at low speed, move the lever up to the
LO position. For steady high-speed wiping, move the
lever up further, to HI. To stop the wipers, move the
lever down to
OFF.
Be sure
to
clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become
damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
Heavy snow or ice can overload your wipers.
A
circuit
breaker will stop them until the motor cools. Clear away
snow or ice to prevent an overload.
Windshield Washer
The lever on the right side of your steering column also
controls your windshield washer. There is a push button
at the end
of
the lever.
To
spray washer fluid on the
windshield, push the button and hold it. The washer will
spray until you release the button. The wipers will
continue to clear the window for about six seconds after
the button is released and then stop or return to your
preset speed.
In freezing weather, don’t use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice
on
the windshield, blocking
your vision.
If the fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir is
low, the message LOW WASHER FLUID will appear
on the Driver Information Center (DIC) display. It will
take
60
seconds after the bottle is refilled for this
message to turn off. For information on the correct
washer fluid mixture to use, see “Windshield Washer
Fluid” and “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”
in
the Index.
Cruise
Control
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25
mph (40
km/h)
or more without keeping your foot on
the accelerator. This can really help on long trips. Cruise
control does not work at speeds below about
25
mph
(40
km/h).
When using cruise control, the accelerator pedal will
return to its fully-released position and will not move
while cruise control. is engaged.
The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display the
cruise set speed in
a
digital number. For example, the
DIC will say CRUISE SET
60
mph
(97
km/h).
When
you apply your brakes or push the clutch pedal, the
cruise control disengages. The DIC will show CRUISE
DISENGAGED. See “DIC Warnings and Messages” in
the Index.
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
can’t drive safely
at
a steady speed.
So,
don’t use your cruise control on winding
roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes
in tire traction can cause needless wheel
spinning, and you could lose control. Don’t
use cruise control on slippery roads.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. (See “Traction
Control System” in the Index.) When road conditions
allow you to safely use it again, you may turn the cruise
control back
on.
2-47
Setting Cruise Control
A
CAUTION:
If
you leave your cruise control switch on when
you’re not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you don’t want to.
You
could be startled and even lose control. Keep the
cruise control switch
off
until you want to use it.
1.
Move the cruise control switch to
ON.
2.
Get up
to
the speed you want.
3.
Push the
SETKOAST
button at
the
end
of
the lever
and release it. The cruise set speed will be displayed
by the Driver Information Center
(DIC).
4.
Take
your foot
off
the accelerator pedal.
The
pedal
will return to an “idle” position.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake or clutch pedal. This, of
course, disengages the cruise control. But you don’t
need to reset it.
Once you’re going about
25
mph
(40
km/h)
or more,
you can move the cruise control switch to
R/A
(Resume/Accelerate) for about half a second. The
Driver Information Center (DIC) will display the cruise
set speed.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
1.
Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed.
The speed
will
not begin to increase until sufficient
pedal travel is achieved. Push the button at the end
of
the lever, then release the button and the accelerator
pedal. You’ll now cruise at the higher speed.
The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display
the cruise set speed.
2.
Move the cruise switch to R/A. Hold it there until
you get up to the speed you want, then release the
switch. To increase your speed in very small
amounts, move the switch to
R/A
for less than half a
second, then release it. Each time you do this, your
vehicle will go about
1
mph
(1.6
km/h)
faster.
The DIC will display the cruise set speed.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
Push in the button at the end of the lever until you
reach the lower speed you want, then release it.
The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display
the cruise set speed.
button for less than half a second. Each time you do
this, you’ll go
1
mph
(1.6
km/h)
slower.
The DIC will display the cruise set speed.
To slow down
in
very small amounts, push the
2-49
Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When
you take your foot
off
the pedal, your vehicle will slow
down to
the
cruise control speed you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.
When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to
a lower gear to keep your speed down.
Of
course,
applying the brake takes you out of cruise control. Many
drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t use
cruise control on steep hills.
Getting Out
of
Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn
off
the cruise control:
0
Step lightly on the brake pedal or push the clutch
pedal,
if
you have a manual transmission vehicle;
or
0
Move the cruise switch to
OFF.
The DIC will display the message “CRUISE
DISENGAGED.”
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn
off
the cruise control or the ignition,
your cruise control set speed memory is erased.
Exterior
Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the
short
periods after dawn and before sunset.
The DRL system will make your front turn signal lamps
come on when:
0
the ignition is on,
the headlamp switch is off and
0
the parking brake is released.
When the DRL
are
on, only your front turn signal lamps
will be on. The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps
will not be
on.
Y’JV
When you turn on your headlamps, your front turn
signal lamps (DRL) will go out. The other lamps that
come on with your headlamps will also come on.
On vehicles built for Canada, when it’s dark enough
outside, your front turn signal lamps will automatically
go out and your headlamps will come on. The other
lamps that come on with your headlamps will also come
on. When it’s bright enough outside, the headlamps will
go off, and your front turn signal lamps (DRL) will
come on.
Also on Canadian vehicles, there is a light sensor in the
defroster grille, at the base of the windshield and the
instrument panel. This sensor makes the
DRL
work
automatically,
so
be sure it isn’t covered.
As
with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
Fog
Lamps
(Option)
Use your fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty
conditions. Your parking lamps or low-beam headlamps
must be on or your fog lamps won’t work.
To turn the fog lamps on, push the button located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering column. A
light on the button will come on when the fog lamps are
on. Push the button again to turn the fog lamps off.
2-51
Interior
Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness Control
This button controls the
brightness of your
instrument panel lights
when your headlamps or
parking lamps
are
on.
Ish and release the button and it will pop out. Turn the
button clockwise (to the right) to brighten the lights or
counterclockwise (to the left) to dim them.
The instrument panel brightness knob has an added
feature called Parade Mode to assist you in seeing
certain instrument panel controls if your headlamps
are
on in the daylight. Right before turning the courtesy
lamps on by turning the button all the way to the right,
the radio, Driver Information Center (DIC) display and
heating and air conditioning controls will come on at
their maximum brightness. This will occur only with the
parking lamps or headlamps on.
Courtesy Lamps
When any door or the hatch/trunk lid is opened, the
interior lamps will go
on
(unless it’s bright outside). The
lamps will stay on for about
30
seconds or until you turn
on the ignition.
You can
also
turn on the courtesy lamps by turning the
interior brightness control button all the way to the right.
Be sure not to have this knob turned all the way down
with the lamps on during the day. Your Driver
Information Center (DIC) may not be visible.
2-52
Reading Lamps
Your inside rearview mirror includes two reading lamps.
The lamps will go on when a door is opened. When the
doors are closed and the ignition is on, each lamp can be
turned on individually by moving the switch (each lamp
has its own switch) to
ON.
There is also
an
interior console flood lamp located
underneath the rearview mirror which comes on with the
headlamps or parking lamps.
Inadvertent Load Control
If the underhood lamp, vanity mirror lamps, reading
lamps, console or glove box lamps
are
accidentally left
on, the power load will time out after
15
minutes.
To
reset it, all of the above lamps must be turned off
or
the
key must be in the
ON
position.
Mirrors
Inside Daymight Rearview Mirror
An inside rearview mirror is attached above your
windshield. The mirror has pivots
so
that you can
adjust it.
You can adjust the mirror for day.or night driving. Pull
the tab for night driving to reduce glare. Push the tab for
daytime driving.
2-53
Powermeated Remote Control Mirrors Convex Outside Mirror
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex.
A
convex
mirror’s surface is curved
so
you
can see more from the
driver’s seat.
A
convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If
you
cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on
your
right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
The electric mirror control is on the driver’s door. To
adjust either mirror, press the
LT (left) or RT (right) switch
to select the mirror, then press the arrows to adjust the
direction of the mirror. The selected mirror will stay on for
20
seconds after the last adjustment.
An
indicator light will
come on above the mirror that you select.
Your preferred mirror position can be stored if you have
the memory option. See “Memory” in the Index.
For operation of the heated outside
mirrors,
see “Rear
Window Defogger” in the Index.
Storage Compartments
Instrument Panel Cupholder
The cupholder is located on the center console.
To
open
it, place your thumb on the left side of the lid and raise
the right side with your index finger.
Center Console
To use this storage area, pull up the lid on the driver's
side front edge of the console and swing it to the
passenger's side.
You can use the key to lock and unlock the console.
Don't leave the key in the lock, or it could be damaged
when the driver sits down.
The fuel fill door release and accessory outlet are
located inside the console.
Security Shade (Option)
The security shade can provide hidden storage in the
rear area of your vehicle. The shade is also helpful in
blocking the glare from the removeable roof when it is
stored in the rear compartment.
Using
the
Security
Shade
1.
Hook the elastic loops
on the front corners
(A)
of the shade
to
the
T-nuts located on the
front corners of the rear
hatch frame.
2.
Hook the elastic loops on the rear corners
(B)
of
the
shade to the hooks recessed inside the rear hatch
frame, near the rear corners.
2-55
Rear
Storage
There are three rear storage compartments in the floor
of
the rear hatch/trunk area.
To
access the center storage compartment, pull up on the
two latches to release the carpet lid.
Remove the carpet lid. There are two other storage
compartments, one on each side
of
the center
compartment. Each
of
these compartments has one latch
which operates the same as the two on the center
carpet lid.
NOTICE:
If
your vehicle has a compact disc player, it is
stored in the center rear storage compartment.
To
help avoid damage to the compact disc player,
do not store items such as liquids or sharp objects
that could puncture
or
cut the compact disc
player
or
wiring.
NOTICE:
Do
not store heavy or sharp objects in the three
storage compartments located in the hatchhunk
area.
If
you do, the objects could damage
the underbody.
Convenience Net
(Option)
Your vehicle may have a convenience net. You will see
it
on
the back wall of the rear area
of
the vehicle.
Put small loads, like grocery bags, in the net. It can help
keep them from falling over during sharp turns or quick
starts and stops. The net is not for larger, heavier loads.
You can unhook the net and place it in one of the rear
storage pockets when you are not using it. On coupe
models only,
a
vinyl storage bag has also been provided.
2-57
Ashtray and Cigarette Lighter
The ashtray
is
located on the instrument panel, next to
the lighter.
To
use the ashtray, lift up on the bottom
of
the door.
To
use the lighter, push it in all the way and let
go.
When it’s ready, it will pop back by itself.
I
NOTICE:
NOTICE:
I
Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand
while
it
is heating.
If
you do, it won’t be able to
I
Don’t put papers and other things that burn into
your ashtray.
If
you do, cigarettes or other
smoking materials could set them on fire,
causing damage.
I
NOTICE:
Loose objects (such as paper clips) can lodge
behind and beneath the ashtray lid and prevent
movement of the lid. Avoid putting small loose
objects near the ashtray.
back away from the heating element when it’s
ready. That can make it overheat, damaging the
lighter and the heating element.
Sun Visors
To
block out glare, you can swing down the visors.
You
can also swing them to the side.
Visor Vanity Mirror
hll down the sun visor and lift the cover to expose the
vanity
mirror.
When the cover is lifted, the lamps will
come on automatically, even if the ignition is off.
Accessory
Outlet
This outlet is located inside the center console, on the
forward left side. Remove the tethered cap to use the
outlet. The outlet can be used to connect electrical
equipment such as
a
cellular phone
or
CB radio. Be sure
to follow the installation instructions included with the
equipment. Replace the cap when the outlet is not in use.
NOTICE:
When using the accessory outlet:
The maximum load
of
any electrical
equipment should not exceed
15
amps.
Be sure to turn
off
any electrical equipment
when not in use. Leaving electrical
equipment on for extended periods can
drain your battery.
We recommend that you see a qualified technician or your
dealer for the proper installation of your equipment.
Floor
Mats
(Option)
Your
vehicle’s floor mats are specially designed to
remain in position under your feet and out of reach of
the accelerator pedal. The driver’s side floor mat is held
in place by two locator hooks and the passenger’s side is
held in place by one.
Be sure that the driver’s side floor mat is properly
placed on the floor
so
that it does not block the
movement of the accelerator pedal.
2-59
How
to
Remove and Replace the
Floor
Mats
Roof
Panel
(Coupe)
To
remove the floor mats,
pull up on the rear of the
mat to disconnect from the
locator hooks.
To
reinstall the floor mats, line up the openings in the
floor mat over the locator hooks and push down
into place.
For proper cleaning instructions
of
the carpeted floor
mats, see “Fabric Protection” in the Index.
Removing the Roof Panel
I
A
CAUTION:
Don’t try to remove the roof panel while the
vehicle is moving. Trying to remove the roof
panel while the vehicle is moving could cause
an
accident. The panel could fall into the vehicle and
cause you to lose control, or it could
fly
off
and
strike another vehicle. You or others could be
injured. Remove the roof panel only when the
vehicle is parked.
Until
you
are sure
you
can remove the panel alone, have
someone help
you.
NOTICE:
To
avoid damage to the roof panel, paint and
weatherstripping do not drop or rest it on its
edges. Place the roof panel in the egg-shaped
stowage receivers after removing it from
the vehicle.
1.
Park on a level surface, set the parking brake firmly
and shift an automatic transmission into PARK (P).
Shift a manual transmission into REVERSE
(R).
Turn the ignition key to
OFF.
Lower both sunshades
and rotate them toward the door glass.
2.
Open the rear liftgate and remove any items that may
interfere with proper storage
of
the roof panel. Also
install the two egg-shaped stowage receivers into the
floor of the rear storage compartment. Secure both
receivers into their proper positions by turning them
to
the left.
3.
Lower the windows and open the doors.
2-61
There are two latches on the front of the roof panel
near each door
(A),
and one rear latch
(B).
4.
To
unlock the front
of
the roof panel, pull down each
of
the front handles. Grasp the handles with your
fingers and pull each toward
you.
Complete a
180"
rotation toward the center
of
the vehicle. Then push
up
on
each of the handles.
2-62
5.
To
unlock the rear of the roof panel, press the latch
release button with your thumb and pull down the
latch lever with your fingers.
6.
After releasing the latches, return the sun visors to
the forward position.
I
7.
Stand on one side of the vehicle and, if necessary,
have your helper stand on the other side. Together,
carefully lift the front edge
of
the panel up and
forward, and out
of
the vehicle opening.
8.
When the panel is loosened from the vehicle, one
person should grasp the roof panel as close to the
center of the
car
as possible and lift away the panel.
2-63
Storing the
Roof
Panel
I
A
CAUTION
If
the roof panel
is
not stored properly,
it
could be
thrown about the vehicle in a crash or sudden
maneuver. People in the vehicle could be injured.
Whenever you store the roof panel
in
the vehicle,
always be sure that
it
is
stored securely in the
rear area using the storage pins.
NOTICE:
To
avoid damage to the roof panel, paint and
weatherstripping, do not drop or rest it on its
edges. Place the roof panel in the egg-shaped
stowage receivers after removing it from
the vehicle.
1.
Turn
the roof panel
so
that the rear edge
of
the panel
is facing the storage area. The locating pins (at the
rear
of
the panel) should point toward the
egg-shaped stowage receivers on the floor of the
center compartment.
2.
Push the panel forward until the pins bottom out in
the receivers.
3.
There are two spring-loaded storage pins on the rear
wall of the storage compartment
(A).
These storage
pins
go
into the slots on each side of the roof
panel
(B).
4.
Gently lower the roof panel onto the carpet ledge.
Then, pull each release rearward and upward to place
the storage pins into the holes of the roof panel.
5.
Gently lift and lower the roof panel to be sure it is
locked into place.
2-65
Installing the
Roof
Panel
I
I
A
CAUTION:
An improperly attached roof panel may fall into
or
fly
off
the vehicle. You or others could be
injured. After installing the roof panel, always
check that it is firmly attached by pushing up
on
the underside of the panel. Check now and then
to
be
sure the roof panel
is
firmly in place.
I
NOTICE:
To
avoid damage to the roof panel, paint and
weatherstripping, do not drop or rest it on
its
edges.
1.
Check to be sure that the front handles and rear latch
on the ceiling
are
in their opened positions before
attempting to install the roof panel.
2. If the roof panel is stored in the rear area, grasp it
with your right hand at the middle edge near the
seatbacks, and with your left hand at the middle of
the edge closest to you. Reverse the steps described
previously under “Storing the Roof Panel.”
3.
Remove the roof panel from the
storage compartment.
4.
In most cases, it is easier to install the removable
roof with two people rather than one. Place the roof
panel over the vehicle.
5.
Position the rear edge of the roof panel to the
weatherstrip on the back
of
the roof opening
(A).
Then align the pins at the rear of the roof panel
weatherstrip with the receiving cup in the body
weatherstrip
(B).
Gently lower the front edge
of
the
roof panel to the front of the body opening
(C).
6.
Rotate the front handles toward the side doors to the
closed position.
7.
Hook
the rear latch by pushing the lever up to the
locked position.
8.
Grasp and tug the roof panel
up
and down and
side-to-side to make sure the roof panel is
securely installed.
2-67
Convertible Top (Option)
The following procedures explain the proper operation
of your convertible top.
1
NOTICE:
I
Certain automatic car washes may cause damage
to your vehicle. The top fabric can be damaged
by top cleaning brushes.
For care and cleaning of your convertible top, see
“Cleaning
Your
Convertible Top” in the index.
When lowering and raising the covertible top, you will
use the following:
A.
Front Edge
of
the Convertible Top
B.
Rear Edge of the Convertible Top
C. Storage Compartment Lid
Lowering Your Convertible
Top
I
NOTICE:
Don’t leave your convertible out with the top
down for any long periods of time. The sun and
rain can damage your seat material and other
things inside your vehicle.
1.
Set the parking brake firmly. Shift an automatic
transmission into PARK (P). Shift a manual
transmission into REVERSE
(R).
Turn
the ignition
key
to
OFF.
Lower both sunshades and rotate them
toward the door glass.
NOTICE:
Before lowering the convertible top into the
storage area, be sure there are no objects in the
way
of the folded, stored top. The weight of
a
stored top on items in the storage area may cause
the convertible top back glass to break.
2.
Unlock the front
of
the convertible top
by
lowering
the latch handles and turning them inward. Push the
latch handles back to the up position.
2-69
3.
Lift upward on the front edge
(A)
of the convertible
top
off
of the windshield frame. Then lift upward
on
the
rear edge
(B)
of the convertible top to be
vertical
off
the storage compartment lid
(C).
The
front edge
(A)
and rear edge
(B)
should be straight
up and down.
4.
Tilt the driver’s seatback forward and press the
storage compartment release button located on the
underside
of
the storage compartment lid
(C)
behind
the driver’s seat. Then raise the storage compartment
lid
(C).
While attempting to raise the lid, if the lid
does not release and
you
hear three chimes, check to
make sure the trunk lid is closed. Also, the lid will
not release if the alarm is turned on or the trunk lid
is open.
After pressing the release button, the driver and
passenger door glass should retract to the
full-down position.
If your vehicle has lost battery power, you can
still open the storage compartment lid
(C)
using
the manual release cable.
The cable
is
located underneath the carpeting behind
the driver and passenger seats in the center of the
vehicle. When using the manual release, you must
first open the doors to prevent damage to the seals.
To
access the cable, lift and pull back the carpeting.
Then pull the cable to release the storage
compartment lid if needed.
NOTICE:
Be sure that the rear edge
(B)
of the convertible
top is in the full-down position before lowering
the top into the storage compartment or damage
to the top may occur.
5.
Push forward on the front edge
(A)
of the convertible
top to allow the rear edge
(B)
of the convertible top
to
be rotated to its full-down position.
2-71
6.
Then move the top rearward to its fully-stored position.
7.
After the top is stored, apply one even push on the
center of the front edge (A) of the convertible top to
assure the top is fully retracted.
8.
Close the storage compartment lid
(C)
by closing
with a swift firm motion.
Raising Your Convertible
Top
1.
Park on a level surface, set the parking brake firmly
and shift an automatic transmission into PARK
(P).
Shift a manual transmission into REVERSE
(R).
Lower both windows and sunshades and turn the
ignition key to
OFF.
2.
Tilt the driver’s seat forward and press the storage
compartment release button, or use the manual
release cable if battery power has been lost. Lift the
storage compartment lid
(C).
(After pressing the
release button, the driver and passenger door glass
should retract to the full-down position, if they have
not already been lowered.)
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.
Pull the top up by firmly gripping the front edge
(A)
of the convertible top with your hand and applying
a
brisk firm upward and forward motion to get the top
in the full-up position.
Lift the
re ar edge
(B)
of the convertible top to its
full-up position by first raising the front edge
(A).
Close the storage compartment lid
(C)
by closing
with a swift, firm motion.
Lower the rear edge
(B)
of the convertible top
by
first slightly pushing the front edge
(A)
of the
convertible top forward.
Push the front edge
(A)
of the convertible top down
from the outside
of
the vehicle, or pull the front
edge
(A)
of the convertible top down from the center
pull-down handle located
in
the inside of the vehicle.
Rotate the latches outward to secure the top in the
up position.
2-73
Instrument Panel
JK
LM
NVO
P
QR
ST
U
2-74
A. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
B.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
C. Instrument Panel Cluster
D. Windshield Wipermasher Lever
E.
DIC Buttons
E
Hazard Warning Flasher Button
G.
Center Air Vent
H.
Audio System
I.
Comfort Controls
J.
Fog Lamp Button (Option)
K.
Remote Hatch Release Button (Coupe) or Remote
Trunk Release Button (Convertible)
L.
Ignition Switch
M.
Shift Lever (Automatic Shown)
N.
Traction Control System (TCS) Switch
0.
Selective Real Time Damping (Option)
P. Instrument Panel Cupholder
Q.
Remote Fuel Door Release Button
R. Ashtray
&
Cigarette Lighter
S.
Parking Brake
T.
Glove Box
U.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
V. Power Accessory Outlet
2-75
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument cluster and Driver Information Center
(DIC)
are
designed to let you
know
at
a
glance
how
your
vehicle
is
running. You’ll
know
how fast you’re going, about how much fuel
you
have left and many other things
you’ll need to
know
to drive safely and economically.
2-76
Speedometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in either miles
per hour (mph)
or
kilometers per hour
(km/h).
You may note that there are
not
two separate scales for
mph and
km/h.
When you press the EM
(EnglishNetric) button on the Driver Information
Center (DIC), the cluster will calculate the proper speed
and move the needle to the correct position. Either the
MPH
or the
km/h
telltale will illuminate, depending on
which measurement you choose.
Tachometer
The tachometer displays the engine speed in thousands
of revolutions per minute (rpm).
Fuel will shut
off
at about
6200
rpm.
If you continue to drive your vehicle at the fuel shut off
rpm,
you could damage your engine. Be sure to operate
your vehicle below the fuel shut off rpm or reduce your
rpm quickly when the fuel shuts off.
Warning Lights, Gages and Messages
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you or
others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be
or
is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions.
As
you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working.
If
you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one
of
your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to let you
know
when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
2-77
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to
do
about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly
--
and even
dangerous.
So
please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.
Your vehicle
also
has a Driver Information Center that
works along with the warning lights and gages. See
“Driver Information Center” in the Index.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to
ON
or START, a chime will
come on for about eight seconds to remind people to
fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is
already buckled.
-
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay
on
until the driver’s belt
is buckled.
Air
Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument’
panel, which shows a deployed air bag symbol. The
system checks the air bag’s electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. The system check includes the air bag sensors,
the air bag modules, the wiring and the diagnostic
module. For more information on the air bag system, see
“Air Bag” in the Index.
This light will come on
when you start your engine,
and it will flash for a few
seconds. Then the light
should go out. This means
the system is ready.
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
engine or comes on when you are driving, your air bag
system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
The air bag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to
ON.
If
the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed
so
it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
Voltmeter
I
When the key is in the
ON
position with the engine not
running, the voltmeter
shows the voltage output of
your battery. When the
engine is running, it shows
the voltage output of the
charging system.
The reading will change as the rate of charge changes
(with engine speed, for example), but
if
the voltmeter
reads at
9
volts or below, your instrument panel and
other systems may shut down. The Driver Information
Center (DIC) will read LOW
VOLTAGE
when your
vehicle is at
10
volts or below. Have it checked right
away. Driving with the voltmeter reading at
10
volts or
below could drain your battery and disable your vehicle.
Brake
System
Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.
BRAKE
This light should come on
when you turn the ignition
key to
START.
If
it doesn’t
come on then, have it fixed
so
it will be ready to warn
you
if
there’s a problem.
If
this warning light stays on after you start the engine,
the parking brake may not be set or there could be a
brake problem. Refer to “Parking Brake” in the Index to
see if it is set. If the parking brake is not set, have your
brake system inspected right away.
2-79
If the light comes on while you
are
driving and you have
Anti-Lock Brake
System
Warning Light
a
LOW
-BRAKE FLUID
message showing on the DIC,
pull
off
the road and stop carefully.
You
may notice that
engine and may stay on for
on, have the vehicle towed for service. (See “Towing on when you
start
your
to the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still system, the light will come
the pedal is, harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer
With the anti-lock brake
several seconds.
Your Vel le” in the Index.)
w
v v
That’s’normal.
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake warning light is on. Driving with the
brake warning light on can lead to an accident.
If
the light is still
on
after you’ve pulled off the road
and stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed
for service.
If the light stays on, turn the ignition to
OFF.
Or,
if
the
light comes on when you’re driving, stop as soon as
possible and turn the ignition
off.
Then start the engine
again to reset the system.
If
the light still stays on, or
comes
on
again while you’re driving, your vehicle needs
service. If the regular brake system warning light isn’t
on, you still have brakes, but you don’t have anti-lock
brakes. If the regular brake system warning light
is
also
on, you don’t have anti-lock brakes and there’s a
problem with your regular brakes. See “Brake System
Warning Light” earlier in this section.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should come
on briefly when you turn the ignition key to
ON.
If
the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed
so
it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
Traction Control System (TCS) Light Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
I
This light should come on
briefly as you start the
engine. If the light doesn’t
come on then, have it fixed
so
it
will be ready to
warn
you if there’s a problem.
This gage shows the engine
coolant temperature. If the
gage pointer moves into the
shaded area, your engine is
too hot!
If
it stays
on,
or comes on and the DIC shows a
SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM message when you’re
driving, there’s a problem with your TCS system and
your vehicle needs service. When this light is on, the
system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving
accordingly. If the driver
turns
off
the Traction Control
System by pressing the button on the console, the TCS
system light will come on and the TRACTION
SYSTEM
OFF
message will show on the DIC.
This means that your engine coolant has overheated.
If
you have been operating your vehicle under normal
driving conditions, you should pull
off
the road, stop
your vehicle and turn
off
the engine as soon as possible.
(The larger tic marks are in increments
of
30
O
below
220°F
(104°C) and in increments of
10
Oabove
220
OF
(104”C).)
In “Problems on the Road,” this manual shows what to
do. See “Engine Overheating’’ in the Index.
2-81
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(Check Engine Light)
CHECK
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD
I1
(On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions
are
at acceptable levels for the life
of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The
CHECK
ENGINE
light comes on to
indicate that there is a problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system
before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more
serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also
designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
NOTICE:
If you keep driving your vehicle with this light
on, after a while, your emission controls may not
work as well, your fuel economy may not be as
good and your engine may not run as smoothly.
This could lead
to
costly repairs that may not be
covered by your warranty.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not
running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it repaired.
This light will also come on during a malfunction in one
of two ways:
0
Light Flashing
--
A
misfire condition has been
detected.
A
misfire increases vehicle emissions and
may damage the emission control system on your
vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis
and service may be required.
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and
service may be required.
Light On Steady
--
An emission control system
If the Light
Is
Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
Reducing vehicle speed.
Avoiding hard accelerations.
Avoiding steep uphill’grades.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see
“If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do
so,
stop the vehicle.
Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least
10
seconds and restart the
engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light
Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle to your
dealer or qualified service center for service.
If
the Light
Is
On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If
so,
your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands
of
fuel?
If
so,
be
sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel (see
“Fuel”
in
the Index). Poor fuel quality will cause your
engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You
may
notice
this
as stalling after start-up,
stalling
when you put
the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration
or
stumbling
on acceleration. (These conditions may go
away once the engine is warmed up.)
This
will be detected
by the system and cause the light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least one
full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light
off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn
off,
have your dealer or qualified service center check the
vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.
Engine
Oil
Pressure Gage
The engine oil pressure
gage shows the engine oil
pressure in psi (pounds per
square inch) or kPa
(kilopascals) when the
engine is running.
Oil pressure should be
20
to
80
psi
(140
to 550 Wa).
(In certain situations such as long, extended idles on hot
days, it could read as low as
6
psi
(40
kPa) and still be
considered normal.) It may vary with engine speed,
outside temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above
the shaded area show the normal operating range.
Readings in the shaded area tell you that the engine is
low on oil, or that you might have some other oil
problem. See “Engine Oil” in the Index.
The engine oil pressure can also be displayed using the
GAGES
button on the Driver Information Center (DIC).
See “Driver Information Center” in the Index.
A
CAUTION:
Don’t keep driving
if
the oil pressure is
low.
If
you do, your engine can become
so
hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have your
vehicle serviced.
2-84
I
NOTICE:
Damage to your engine from neglected oil
problems can be costly and
is
not covered by
your warranty.
Security Light
This light comes on to
remind you to
arrn
your
I
SECURITY
theft-deterrent system.
If
it
comes on and stays on when
I
your ignition
is
on, there
may be a problem with your
theft-deterrent system.
Check Gages, Light
CHECK
GAGES
This light will come on
briefly when you are
starting the engine. If the
light comes on and stays on
while you are driving, check
your gages to see
if
they are
in the warning areas.
This light can come on for the following reasons:
0
Low Oil Pressure
0
High Coolant Temperature
0
High or Low Battery Voltage
0
Low Fuel Level
See “Universal Theft-Deterrent” and “PASS-Key
System” in the Index.
2-85
Fuel
Gage
81
Your fuel gage shows
about how-much fuel is in
your tank.
,e
red
zon
When the needle approaches th e, RESERVE
FUEL will appear
on
the Driver Information Center
(DIC) display. When the needle approaches the “E”,
LOW FUEL will appear on the display.
Press RESET to let the vehicle know that you have
acknowledged a DIC message(s). Pressing RESET will
also turn
off
a DIC message but the LOW FUEL
message will come on again in’lO minutes if you have
not added fuel to the vehicle.
Here are three concerns some owners have had about the
fuel gage. All these situations are normal and do not
indicate that anything is wrong with the fuel gage.
At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before the
gage reads FULL (F).
0
It takes more (or less) fuel to fill up than the gage
reads. For example, the gage reads half full, but it
took more (or less) than half of the tank’s capacity to
fill
it.
The gage moves a little when you turn, stop or
speed up.
You can use the DIC to display more detailed fuel
information. Each time you press FUEL, one of the
following will appear
in
the DIC.
AVERAGE:
The fuel economy calculated for the
current
tank
of
fuel,
or since you last reset
the
display.
INST
The fuel economy calculated for your current
driving conditions.
RANGE:
The distance you can drive before refueling.
0
BLANK:
The fuel gage is displayed alone.
You should reset the fuel information display every time
you refuel.
To
reset the display, press FUEL until
AVERAGE appears. Then, press RESET on the DIC.
2-86
Driver Information Center
(DIC)
The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display
information about how your vehicle is functioning, as
well as warning messages if a system problem is
detected. The DIC display area is located in the
instrument cluster below the speedometer and
tachometer, directly above the steering column.
The following buttons are on the DIC control panel
which is located to the right of the cluster:
1
FUEL:
Press this button to display fuel information
such as fuel economy and range.
2
GAGES:
Use this button to display gage information
like oil pressure and temperature, coolant temperature,
transmission fluid temperature, battery voltage and
fronthear tire pressures.
3
TRIP:
Use this button to display your total and trip
miles, the elapsed time function, your average speed and
the oil life.
4
OPTIONS:
This button allows you to choose personal
options available with your vehicle such as security,
door locks, easy entry seats and language.
5
EM:
Use this button to change the display between
English and metric units.
RESET:
This button, used along with the other buttons,
will reset system functions and turn
off
or acknowledge
messages on the DIC.
At the top of the DIC control buttons is a light sensor.
Be sure not to block the sensor or your lighting
functions may be disrupted.
2-87
DIC Controls and Displays
Turn on the system by turning the ignition to
ON.
When
you turn on the ignition, the DIC will be in the mode last
displayed when the engine was turned
off.
Each DIC
button allows you to scroll through a menu. A blank
page ends each menu.
If a problem is detected, a diagnostic message will
appear on the display. Press RESET to acknowledge any
current warning or service messages. The following
pages will show the messages you can see on the DIC
display by pressing the DIC buttons.
1
FUEL
The
FUEL
button displays average fuel economy and
instantaneous fuel economy calculated for your specific
driving conditions and range.
I
AVERAGE
27.0
MPG
INST.
20.4
MPG
RANGE
220
MI
=
Press the
FUEL
button to display average fuel economy,
such as:
AVERAGE
20.1
MPG or
0
AVERAGE
5.3
WlOO
km
The average
fuel
economy
is
viewed as a long-term
approximation of your overall driving conditions. If you
press RESET in this mode while you’re driving, the
system will begin figuring fuel economy from that point
in time.
Press
FUEL
again to display instantaneous fuel
economy, such as:
0
INST.
20.1
MPG or
0
INST. 5.3
WlOO
km
Press FUEL again to display the range, such as:
0
RANGE
20
MI or
RANGE32km
The range calculates the remaining distance you can
drive without refueling. It's based on fuel economy and
the fuel remaining in the tank.
If
the range is lower than 30 miles
(48
krn),
the display
will read RANGE LOW.
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range is
an average of recent driving conditions.
As
your driving
conditions change, this data is gradually updated.
Resetting the fuel range causes the fuel economy data to
be updated immediately. Press RESET to reset the
fuel range.
2
GAGES
The GAGES button allows you to scroll through the
functions listed below when you press it.
GAGES
2
OIL
PRESSURE
40
PSI
-
OILTEMP. 234"
F
-
COOLANT
TEMP
123
"F
-
TRANS FLUID 123°F
-
BATTERY
VOLTS 13.5
-
FRONT
L
34
R
33
PSI
-
REAR L 34
R
33
PSI
-,
Press the GAGE button to display the oil pressure,
such as:
0
OIL
PRESSURE
40
PSI or
0
OIL
PRESSURE
276
kPa
2-89
Press
the
GAGE
button again to display the oil
temperature, such as:
OIL
TEMP 234
O
F
or
OILTEMP
112
O
C
Press the
GAGE
button again to display the coolant
temperature, such as:
COOLANT TEMP 123
O
F
or
COOLANTTEMP51
O
C
Press the
GAGE
button again to display the transmission
fluid temperature (automatics only), such as:
TRANS
FLUID 123
O
For
TRANS FLUID 51
O
C
Press the
GAGE
button again to display the battery
voltage, such as:
0
BATTERY 13.5 VOLTS
Press the
GAGE
button again to display the tire pressure
for the front tires (left and right), such as:
FRONT L34 R33
PSI or
FRONT L 234 R228
kPa
Press the
GAGE
button again to display the tire pressure
for the rear tires (left and right), such as:
REAR L34 R33
PSI
or
0
REAR L234 R228
kPa
3
TRIP
The TRIP button allows you to scroll through the
functions listed below when you press it.
ODOMETER 12345 MI
TRIP
A
123.4 MI
TRIP
6
123.4
MI
IELAP.
TIME
oo:oo.o
I
I
AVG.
SPEED
000.0
MPH
I
I
OIL LIFE REMAIN
89%
1
Odometer
The odometer shows how
far
your vehicle has been
driven in either miles or kilometers. Press the TRIP
button to display odometer readings such
as:
0
ODOMETER
12345
MI
or
0
ODOMETER
20008
km
Without the keys being in the ignition, you can also
display the odometer by turning on the parking lamps.
2-91
‘hip Odometers Elapsed Time
There
are
two trip odometers. Press the TRIP button and
TRIP A will be displayed. Press it again and TRIP
B
will be displayed. TRIP A could be used to track the
distance to a destination. TRIP B could be used to track
maintenance periods.
TRIP A 130.5 MI or
TRIP A 209.9
km
TRIP B 300.5 MI or
0
TRIP
B
483.5
km
The trip odometers can be reset by pushing the RESET
button on the DIC. Both
of
the trip odometers can be
used simultaneously.
Miles Since Last Ignition Feature
You can also display number of miles driven since you
last started the car if you press and hold the RESET
button for two seconds, then release. The miles (or
kilometers) since the last ignition cycle will be set into
the trip odometer.
Press the TRIP button until ELAP. TIME is displayed,
such as
ELM.
TIME
00:
00
:
00.
When the ignition is in the
ON
position, the DIC
can
be
used as a stopwatch. The display can show hours,
minutes, seconds and hundredths of a second. The
elapsed time indicator will record up to 99 hours,
59 minutes and 59 seconds, then
it
will reset to zero and
continue counting. (Hundredths are shown up to
59 minutes, 59 seconds and 99 hundredths). The display
appears as ELAP. TIME
00:
00
:
00
in the elapsed
time function.
You can start or stop the elapsed time by pressing
RESET. To reset the elapsed time to zero, stop the timer
by pressing
RESET.
Then press and hold RESET for
two seconds and release.
2-92
Average Speed
Press the
TRIP
button until the average speed
is
displayed, such as:
AVERAGE SPEED
62
MPH or
AVERAGE SPEED
100
km/h
Press reset in this mode to start calculating the average
speed. Press and hold RESET to clear.
Engine Oil Life
Press the TRIP button until the engine oil life is
displayed, such as
OIL
LIFE REMAIN 89%.
This is an estimate of the engine oil’s remaining useful
life. It will show 99% when the system is reset after an
oil change.
It
will
alert you to change your oil on a
schedule consistent with your driving conditions.
When the remaining oil life is low, the system will alert
you with the message CHANGE
OIL
SOON.
When the oil life is down to zero, ‘you will receive the
message
CHANGE
OIL
NOW.
To reset the
OIL
LEE reminder after an oil change:
1.
With the ignition on, press the TRIP button
so
the
OIL
LIFE
percentage is displayed.
2.
Press
RESET and hold for two seconds. The word
RESET
will
appear, then
OIL
LIFE 99%.
Remember, you must reset the
OIL
LIFE yourself after
each oil change. It will not reset itself. Also, be careful
not to reset the
OIL
LIFE
accidentally at any time other
than when the oil has just been changed. It can’t be reset
accurately until the next oil change.
The DIC does not replace the need to maintain your
vehicle as recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in
this manual. Also, the oil change reminder will not
detect dusty conditions or engine malfunctions that may
affect the oil.
If
you drive in dusty areas, change your oil
after every
3,000
miles
(5
000
km)
or three months,
whichever occurs first, unless the DIC instructs you to
do
so
sooner. Also, the oil change reminder does not
measure how much oil you have in your engine,
so
be
sure to check your oil level often. See “Engine Oil” in
the Index.
2-93
4
OPTIONS
This button allows you to choose personal options
available with your vehicle, such as security, door locks,
easy entry seats and language. Some of these functions
work along with the key fob transmitter.
When returning to the options menu, the first, item of the
options list will always be displayed, not the one you
were last in when you changed buttons.
LOCKURM
-
HORN ONLY
-
ALARM
-
HORN
-
-
PASSIVE UNLK DRIVER
AUTO
LOCK
ON
-
APPROACH LIGHTS ON
-
AUTO UNLOCK- DRIVER
k
I
SEAT EASY ENTRY
ON
I
LANGUAGE ENGLISH
t
FOB
TRAINING
TIRE
TRAINING
2-94
The following
are
the options listed under the
OPTIONS button:
Lock
and
Arm
Press the OPTIONS button until LOCK
&
ARM
appears on the display, then use the RESET button to
page through the following selections:
LOCK
&
ARM
OFF
LOCK
&
ARM
HORN
ONLY
LOCK
&
ARM
LIGHTS
ONLY
LOCK
&
ARM
HORN
&
LTS
If you choose LOCK
&
ARM
OFF,
you will receive no
security feedback when locking or unlocking
your vehicle.
If you choose LOCK
&
ARM
HORN
ONLY,
only the
horn will chirp to let you know when your alarm system
has armed when locking your vehicle.
If you choose LOCK
&
ARM
LIGHTS, only your
exterior lamps will flash to let you know when your
alarm system has armed when locking your vehicle.
If
you choose LOCK
&
ARM
HORN
&
LTS, the horn
will clvrp
and
the exterior lamps will flash briefly to let
you know the system has armed when locking
your vehicle.
Alarm
Press the OPTIONS button until ALARM appears on
the display, then use the RESET button to page through
the following selections:
0
ALARMHORN
ALARM HORN
&
LIGHTS
If you choose ALARM HORN, the horn will sound
during
an
alarm. If you choose ALARM HORN
&
LIGHTS, the horn will sound and the interior and
exterior lamps will flash during an alarm.
Passive
Unlock
Press the OPTIONS button until PASSIVE UNLOCK
appears on the display, then use the RESET button to
page through the following selections:
PASSIVE
UNLOCK-
DRIVER
0
PASSIVE UNLOCK- BOTH
If you choose the PASSIVE UNLOCK- DRIVER, only
the driver’s door lock
will
be programmed to passively
unlock. The driver’s door will passively unlock when
you approach the vehicle with the key fob transmitter
slider switch set to
ON.
If
you choose PASSIVE UNLOCK- BOTH, the driver
and passenger’s door locks will be programmed to
passively unlock. The driver and passenger doors will
passively unlock when you approach the vehicle with
the key fob transmitter slider switch set to
ON.
See “Remote Function Actuation (FWA) System” in the
Index for more information.
Approach
Lights
Press the OPTIONS button until APPROACH LIGHTS
appears on the display, then use the RESET button to
page through the following choices:
0
APPROACH LIGHTS ON
0
APPROACH LIGHTS OFF
If
you choose APPROACH LIGHTS ON, the fog lamps,
front
turn
signal, rear back-up and courtesy lamps will
come on for
30
seconds as you approach the vehicle
with the key fob transmitter. This will occur only when
it
is dark outside.
APPROACH LIGHTS
OFF
turns
off
this option.
See “Remote Function Actuation (RFA) System” in the
Index for more information.
2-95
Auto
Lock
Press the OPTIONS button until AUTO LOCK appears
on the display, then use the RESET button to page
through the following choices:
AUTO LOCK
ON
AUTO LOCK
OFF
If you choose AUTO LOCK ON, both doors will
automatically lock when the vehicle exceeds
10
mph
(16
ktnh)
in a manual transmission. In a vehicle with an
automatic transmission, both doors will automatically
lock when you move the shifter out of PARK (P).
Choose AUTO LOCK
OFF
to turn this option
off.
Auto
Unlock
The AUTO UNLOCK will be available only
if
AUTO
LOCK is set to ON.
Press the OPTIONS button until AUTO UNLOCK
appears
on
the display, then use the RESET button to
page through the following choices:
AUTO UNLOCK
-
DRIVER
0
AUTO UNLOCK
-
BOTH
0
AUTO UNLOCK
OFF
If you choose AUTO UNLOCK- DRIVER, the driver’s
door will automatically unlock when you turn the
vehicle
off
and pull the key out of the ignition.
Choose AUTO UNLOCK
-
BOTH, and both doors will
automatically unlock when you turn the vehicle
off
and
pull the key out of the ignition.
AUTO UNLOCK
OFF
turns off this option.
Easy Entry
The easy entry feature will only be available if the
vehicle is equipped with the memory option.
Press the OPTIONS button until SEAT EASY ENTRY
appears on the display, then use the RESET button to
page through the following choices:
0
SEAT EASY ENTRY ON
SEAT EASY ENTRY
OFF
If you choose SEAT EASY ENTRY
ON,
when you turn
the ignition off and remove the key, the seat will
automatically move back for an easy exit or an easy
entrance when returning to the vehicle.
SEAT EASY ENTRY
OFF
turns
off
this option.
Languages
You can select which language the DIC will display its
messages in. Press the OPTIONS button until the word
LANGUAGES appears on the display, then use the
RESET button to page through the following choices:
0
LANGUAGE ENGLISH
LANGUAGE FRENCH
LANGUAGE GERMAN
LANGUAGE SPANISH
Blank Page
There is a blank page at the end
of
the OPTIONS menu.
When the blank page is displayed, you can access the
following items:
FOB
TRAINING:
This
option allows you to match the
RFA transmitter(s) to your vehicle. You can access this
option by pressing and holding RESET for two seconds
while you are on the blank page at the end
of
the
OPTIONS menu. The message
FOB
TRAINING will be
displayed. See “Matching Transmitter(s) To Your
Vehicle” in the Index.
TIRE
TRAINING:
The Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
operates with battery-powered sensors that
are
located
inside the valve stems on each tire. Each sensor has a
unique ID code
so
the vehicle knows the tire location of
the sensor. When the vehicle reaches a speed
of
greater
than
15
mph (24
km/h),
the sensors begin to send the
tire pressure readings to a receiver inside the vehicle.
These readings are displayed when using the GAGES
button on the DIC. If you
are
unable to display your tire
pressures while the vehicle speed is greater than
15
mph
(24
km/h),
you may need to have your sensor ID codes
learned by the vehicle. See your dealer.
DIC
Warnings and Messages
The following messages and warnings may appear in the
DIC display. The DIC display area is located in the
instrument cluster below the speedometer and
tachometer, directly above the steering column. You
may receive more than one message at a time. Messages
will appear one behind the other. To acknowledge a
message and remove it from the display, press
RESET.
You may scroll through the messages that may have
been sent at the same time. The message center is
continuously updated with the vehicle
performance status.
2-97
ABS ACTIVE (Anti-Lock Brake System Active)
-
:
When your anti-lock system is adjusting brake pressure
to help avoid a braking skid, the ABS ACTIVE message
will be displayed.
Slippery road conditions may exist if this message is
displayed,
so
adjust your driving accordingly. The
message will stay on for a few seconds after the system
stops adjusting brake pressure.
SERVICE ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)
-
:
If
the
SERVICE ABS message is displayed when you
are
driving, stop as soon as possible and turn the ignition
off. Then start the engine again to reset the system. If
the message stays on, or comes back on again while you
are driving, your vehicle is in need of service. If the
regular brake system warning light isn’t on, you still
have brakes, but don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the
regular brake system light is also on, you don’t have
anti-lock brakes and there is a problem with your
brakes.
See
“Brake System Warning Light” earlier in
this section.
If the SERVICE ABS message is being displayed, your
traction control system and the optional active handling
system will also be disabled. The driver information
center will scroll three messages SERVICE ABS,
SERVICE TRACTION SYS. and SERVICE ACTIVE
HNDLG and the instrument cluster car icon will be
illuminated. The driver can acknowledge these messages
by pressing the reset button three times. When the
service message is displayed the computer controlled
systems will not assist the driver and you should have
the system repaired as soon as possible. Adjust your
driving accordingly.
SERVICE COLUMN LOCK:
The system that
controls the locking and unlocking of the steering
column may not work properly. Have the vehicle towed
to a dealer for service.
LOW OIL
PRESSURE:
You will hear four chimes and
the CHECK GAGES telltale will come on when this
message is displayed.
To
acknowledge the warning,
press the RESET button. After you press the RESET
button, a message will be displayed and you will hear a
chime every minute until the vehicle is serviced.
If
you
do not press RESET, the message will remain on the
digital display until the vehicle is serviced.
Low oil pressure may be the result of a combination of
low oil level and abrupt changes in the vehicle’s
direction. When this warning
is
displayed, you should
not operate the engine at high
RPM
or make fast abrupt
moves. When convenient, you should check the oil
level. See “Engine Oil” in the Index.
LOW OIL LEVEL:
Press RESET to acknowledge that
you have read the message and to remove it from the
display. The message will reappear every
10
minutes
until this condition changes.
You will hear two chimes when this message is
displayed. If this message appears after starting your
engine, your engine oil level may be too low. You may
need to add oil. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.
REDUCED ENGINE POWER:
You will hear chimes
continuously when this message is displayed. To
acknowledge that you have read the message and to
remove it from the display, press RESET. The message
will reappear every
15
seconds until this
condition changes.
If the Driver Information Center displays the
REDUCED ENGINE POWER message and the
CHECK ENGINE light comes on, a noticeable
reduction in the vehicle’s performance may occur.
If
the
REDUCED ENGINE POWER message is displayed but
there is no reduction
in
performance, proceed to your
destination. The performance may be reduced the next
time the vehicle is driven.
The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed while the
REDUCED ENGINE POWER message is displayed,
but acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime the
CHECK ENGINE light stays on, the vehicle should be
taken to an authorized Chevrolet dealer as soon as
possible for diagnosis and repair.
Also, refer to “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” (Check
Engine Light) in the Index.
If
the REDUCED ENGINE
POWER message is displayed in combination with the
COOLANT OVER TEMP message, see “Engine
Overheating” in the Index.
SERVICE VEHICLE
SOON:
If this message appears
on
the DIC, there may be an electrical or another system
problem with your vehicle. Have your vehicle checked
by your dealer if this message keeps appearing.
CHARGE SYSTEM FAULT
Press
RESET
to
acknowledge that you have read the message and to
remove it from the display. The message will reappear
every
10
minutes until this condition changes. You will
hear two chimes when this message is displayed.
2-99
If
this message comes on while you are driving, you
may have a problem with the electrical charging system.
It could indicate that you have a loose or broken drive
belt
or
another electrical problem. Have it checked right
away. Driving while this light is on could drain
your battery.
If
you must drive a short distance with the message on,
be certain to turn
off
your accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
TRACTION SYS ACTIVE
-
:
When your traction
control system is limiting wheel spin, the TRACTION
SYS
ACTIVE message will be displayed. Slippery road
conditions may exist
if
this message is displayed,
so
adjust your driving accordingly. The message will stay
on for a few seconds after the traction control system
stops limiting wheel spin.
TRACTION SYSTEM-ON:
This message is displayed
when you decide to turn on the TCS by pressing the
switch
on
the console. This message will shut
off
automatically on its own.
TRACTION SYSTEM-OFF:
You will hear a single
quick tone when this message is displayed. This
message comes on and stays on when the TCS button
on the console is pressed to turn the system
off.
To
acknowledge this message, press
RESET.
SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM
-
:
If the SERVICE
TRACTION
SYS
message is displayed when you
are
driving, there is a problem with your Traction Control
System and your vehicle is in need
of
service. When this
message is displayed, the system will not limit wheel
spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
If you have the optional Active Handling System, the
SERVICE ACTIVE
HNDLG
message will also be
displayed and the instrument cluster car icon will also be
illuminated. The driver can acknowledge both messages
by pressing the reset button two times which
will
also
turn
off
the instrument cluster icon. When the service
messages are displayed, the computer controlled
systems will not assist the driver in controlling the
vehicle. Have the system repaired as soon as possible.
Adjust your driving accordingly.
2-100
SERVICE RIDE CONTROL:
This message is used to
indicate to the driver that the Selective Real Time
Damping (SRTD) system has detected a malfunction
and that the system must be serviced. The SERVICE
RIDE CONTROL message will always come on when a
failure is detected by the Selective Real Time Damping
system. If
a
fault is present in the SRTD which causes
the shocks to be in their full soft condition, the
SERVICE RIDE CONTROL, SHOCKS
INOPERATIVE and MAXIMUM
80
MPH (129
km/h)
will display together. You will never get a SHOCKS
INOPERATIVE and MAXIMUM SPEED
80
MPH
(129
km/h)
message without a SERVICE RIDE
CONTROLmessage.
SHOCKS INOPERATIVE:
You will hear four chimes
when this message is displayed. To acknowledge that
you have read the message and to remove it from the
display, press RESET. The message will reappear every
10
minutes until this condition changes.
This message indicates that a malfunction is present in
the Selective Real Time Damping system which is
causing the shocks to be in their full soft mode. This is a
warning to the driver that the vehicle handling may be
affected. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
MAXIMUM
SPEED
80
MPH
(129
km/h):
You will
hear four chimes when this message is displayed.
To
acknowledge the warning, press RESET. After you press
RESET, a message will reappear every
10
minutes until
this condition changes.
This message indicates that the vehicle speed will be
limited to
80
mph (129
km/h)
when the shock absorber
system has failed and the shocks are in their full
soft
mode. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
LOW COOLANT
You will hear two chimes when this
message is displayed. To acknowledge the warning,
press RESET. After you press RESET, a message will
reappear and you will hear a chime every
10
minutes
until this condition changes.
This message indicates that the coolant in the system is
low. You may need to add coolant. See “Engine
Overheating” in the Index.
COOLANT OVER TEMP:
You
will
hear four chimes
and the CHECK GAGES telltale
will
come
on
when this
message is displayed. To acknowledge the warning,
press the RESET button. After you press the RESET
button, a message will be displayed and you will hear a
chime every minute until this condition changes. If you
do not press RESET, the message will remain on the
digital display until the condition changes.
2-101
If the engine coolant exceeds 255
“F
(124”C), this
message is displayed. If you have been operating your
vehicle under normal driving conditions, you should
pull off from
the
road, stop your vehicle and turn
off
the
engine as soon as possible. You can monitor the coolant
temperature with the GAGES button on the DIC or the
engine coolant gage on the instrument panel cluster. See
“Engine Overheating” in the Index.
HIGH OIL TEMPERATURE
REDUCE
ENGINE
RPM:
You will hear four chimes when this message is
displayed. To acknowledge the warning, press the
RESET button. After you press the RESET button, a
message will be displayed and you will hear a chime
every minute until this condition changes. If you do not
press RESET, the message will remain on the digital
display until the condition changes.
If the engine oil temperature exceeds
320°F
(1
60” C),
this message is displayed. You should check the engine
coolant temperature and engine oil level. If your engine
is too hot, see “Engine Overheating’’ in the Index. Your
vehicle may need service,
so
see your dealer. You can
monitor the oil temperature with the GAGES button on
the DIC.
HIGH
TRANS TEMP: You will hear four chimes
when this message is displayed. To acknowledge this
warning, press the RESET button. After you press the
RESET button, the message will be displayed every
10 minutes until the condition changes. If you do not
press RESET, the message remains on the display until
the condition changes.
If the transmission fluid temperature rises above 263°F
(128°C) or rises rapidly, this message is displayed. The
transmission may shift gears or apply the torque
converter clutch to reduce the fluid temperature. Driving
aggressively or driving on long hills can cause the
transmission fluid temperature to be higher than normal.
If this message appears, you may continue to drive at a
slower speed. You should also monitor the transmission
fluid temperature and allow it to cool to at least 230°F
(1 10°C). The transmission fluid temperature can be
monitored with the GAGES button on the DIC. See
“Automatic Transmission Fluid” in the Index. You
should also check the engine coolant temperature.
If
it is
also hot, see “Engine Overheating” in the Index.
If the HIGH TRANS TEMP message is displayed
during normal vehicle operation on flat roads, your
vehicle may need service. See your dealer for an
inspection.
2-102
LOW TIRE PRESSURE
-
(LF, LR, RF, RR):
YOU
will hear two chimes when this message is displayed. To
acknowledge the warning, press RESET. After you press
RESET, a message will reappear and you will hear a
chime every
10
minutes until this condition changes.
This message indicates that the pressure in one of your
tires is less than
25
psi
(172
Ea). Next to the LOW
TIRE PRESSURE message, you can see either
LF
(left
front), LR (left rear),
RF
(right front)
or
RR
(right rear)
to indicate to you which tire is low on pressure.
You
can
receive more than one tire pressure message at a time.
To read other messages that may have been sent at the
same time, press RESET. If a tire pressure message
appears on the
DIC,
stop
as
soon as you can. Have the
tire pressures checked and set to those shown on your
Tire Loading Information Label. See “Extended
Mobility Tires” in the Index.
When the LOW TIRE PRESSURE or FLAT
TIRE message is displayed on the Driver
Information Center, your vehicle’s handling
capabilities will be reduced during severe
maneuvers.
If
you
drive too fast, you could lose
control of your vehicle.
You
or others could be
injured. Don’t drive over
55
mph
(90
km/h)
when
the LOW TIRE PRESSURE or FLAT TIRE
message is displayed. Drive cautiously, and check
your tire pressures as
soon
as
you
can.
2-103
FLAT
TIRE
-
(LF,
LR, RF, RR):
You will hear two
chimes when this message is displayed followed by the
message MAX SPEED
55
MPH
(90
km/h).
If
this
message appears, do not drive your vehicle above these
limits. The next message to appear is REDUCED
HANDLING. Adjust your driving accordingly. To
acknowledge these warnings, press RESET. After you
press RESET, a message will reappear and you will hear
a chime every
10
minutes until this condition changes.
This message indicates that the pressure in one
of
your
tires is lower than
5
psi
(34
Wa). Next to the FLAT
TIRE message, you can see either LF (left front),
LR
(left rear),
RF
(right front) or
RR
(right rear) to indicate
to you which tire is flat. You can receive more than one
tire pressure message at a time. To read other messages
that may have been sent at the same time, press RESET.
If a tire pressure message appears on the
DIC,
stop as
soon as you can. Have the tire pressures checked and set
to those shown on your Tire Loading Information Label.
See “Extended Mobility Tires” and “Tire Inflation” in
the Index.
When the LOW TIRE PRESSURE or FLAT
TIRE message
is
displayed on the Driver
Information Center, your vehicle’s handling
capabilities will be reduced during severe
maneuvers.
If
you drive too fast, you could lose
control of your vehicle. You or others could be
injured. Don’t drive over
55
mph
(90
kmh)
when
the
LOW
TIRE PRESSURE or
FLAT
TIRE
message
is
displayed. Drive cautiously, and check
your tire pressures as soon as you can.
HIGH
TIRE
PRESSURE
-
(LF,
LR,
RF,
RR):
YOU
will hear
two
chimes when
this
message is displayed.
To
acknowledge the warning, press RESET. After you press
RESET, a message
will
reappear and you will hear a
chime every
10
minutes
until
this
condition changes.
This
message indicates that the pressure in one of your tires is
higher than
42
psi
(290
Pa). Next to the
HIGH
TIRE
PRESSURE message,
you
can see either
LF
(left front),
LR
(left rear),
RF
(right front)
or
RR
(right rear) to
indicate to you which tire is higher than
42
psi
(290
Wa).
You
can receive more than one
tire
pressure message at a
time. To read other messages that may have been sent at
the same time, press RESET.
If
a tire pressure message
appears
on
the
DX,
stop as soon as you can. Have the tire
pressures checked and set to those shown on your Tire
Loading Information Label. See “Extended
Mobility
Tires” and “Tire Inflation”
in
the Index.
SERVICE
TIRE
MON
SYS:
If
this message comes
on,
a part
on
the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) is not
working properly. If you drive your vehicle while any of
the four sensors are missing or hoperable, the warning
will come on in approximately
10
minutes. If all
four
sensors are missing, the warning will come on in
approximately
15
to
20
minutes. (All the sensors would
be missing, for example, if you put different wheels on
your vehicle without transferring the sensors.) If the
warning comes
on
and stays on, there may be a problem
with the TPM. See your dealer.
2-105
Other
Messages
Here are more messages that you can receive on your
Driver Information Center. To acknowledge a message
and read another message that may have come on at the
same time, press the RESET button.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
BRAKE BEFORE SHIFT
(Automatic Transmissions Only)
CHANGE
OIL
NOW
CHANGE OIL SOON
CRUISE DISENGAGED
CRUISE SET
-
MPH
(-
ktn/h)
DOOR AJAR
ENGINE PROTECTION REDUCE ENGINE
RPM
HATCH AJAR (Coupe)
TRUNK AJAR (Convertible)
HIGH VOLTAGE
0
LOW BRAKE
F‘LUID
(See “Brake Fluid” in
the Index)
0
LOW COOLANT (See “Engine Overheating” in
0
LOW
FUEL
(fuel range is less
than
50
miles
(80
km))
the Index)
0
LOW VOLTAGE
LOW WASHER
FLUID
0
PULL
KEY
-
WAIT
10
SEC
RESERVE FUEL
UPSHIFTNOW
2-106
.
..
Section
3
Comfort Controls and Audio
Systems
In this section, you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle. Be
sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle.
3-2
3-2
3-4
3-9
3- 10
3-11
3-11
3- 12
3-12
3-12
3-17
Comfort Controls
Manual
Comfort
Controls
Automatic Electronic Dual Climate Control
System (If Equipped)
Sensors
Air Conditioning
Heating
Defogging and Defrosting
Audio Systems
Setting the Clock for
All
Systems
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player and
Automatic Tone Control
CD Adapter Kits
3- 17
3-2 1
3-25
3 -27
3-27
3-28
3-29
3-29
3-29
3-30
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and
Automatic Tone Control
(If
Equipped)
Trunk Mounted CD Changer
Theft-Deterrent Feature
Understanding Radio Reception
Tips About Your Audio System
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
Care of Your Compact Discs
Care
of
Your Compact Disc Player
Power Mast Antenna (Option)
Integrated Windshield and Rear Window
Antennas (Option)
3-1
Comfort
Controls
This section tells you how to make your air system work
for you. Your comfort control system uses
ozone-friendly
R-
134a refrigerant.
With these systems, you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation in your vehicle. Your vehicle also has
a flow-through ventilation system described later
in
this section.
Manual Comfort Controls
Fan Knob
The left knob is the fan knob and selects the force
of
air
you want.
Turn
the knob
to
the right to increase
fan
speed
and to the
left
to decrease
fan
speed. The
fan
must be
turned on for the
air
conditioning compressor to operate.
Temperature
Knob
The center knob controls the temperature of the air
coming through the system.
Turn
it to the left (toward
the blue area) for cooler air. Turn it to the right (toward
the red area) for warmer air.
Mode
Knob
The right knob selects the direction of where the air will
enter the vehicle.
/.I
UPPER:
This
setting directs most
of
the
air
through the instrument panel outlets with a very small
amount of air directed to the lower outlets.
+H
BI-LEVEL:
This setting directs air into your
vehicle in two ways. Cooler air
is
directed toward your
upper body through the instrument panel outlets, while
warmer air is directed through the lower outlets.
*e
+e
a
+'
LOWER:
This setting directs most of the air
through the lower ducts to the floor area of the vehicle
with some of the air also directed toward the windshield
and side window vents.
+#
DEFOG:
This setting divides the air between the
windshield and lower outlets with a small amount
directed toward the side window vents. This is useful
when fog appears on the windshield or side glass due to
rain or snowy conditions.
DEFROST
Use this setting to quickly remove fog
or frost from the windshield. This setting directs most of
the airflow to the windshield with
a
small amount
directed toward the lower and side window outlets.
Mode
Buttons
These buttons control the air intake, the air conditioning
and the rear window defogger operation.
FRESH
AIR:
Press this button and
it
will bring
outside air into your vehicle. The light on the button will
come on when operating. Use this setting while trying to
defrost or defog windows to help clear moisture.
RECIRCULATE:
Press this button to limit the
amount of fresh air entering your vehicle by
recirculating most of the
air
inside your vehicle. The
light on the button will come on when operating. This
setting is helpful when you are trying to cool the air
quickly or to limit odors entering your vehicle.
RECIRCULATE cannot be used while in the DEFROST
or
DEFOG
modes.
e
A/C:
This button turns the air conditioning
compressor
off
or on under most conditions. The light
on the A/C button comes on when the compressor is
operating. The air conditioning does not operate at
temperatures below approximately
35
OF
to 40°F
(2"
C
to 4°C). The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies the
air coming into the vehicle. The air conditioning cannot
be turned
off
in DEFROST as it helps to remove
moisture from the vehicle. It also helps to keep the
windows clear.
The air conditioning may be forced
off
at high engine
speeds
or
high engine oil or coolant temperatures.
3-3
Automatic Electronic Dual Climate Control
System
(If
Equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Dual Zone
Electronic Climate Control System. This system can
automatically adjust and control temperature output, fan
speed, air delivery mode, air conditioning operation and
air intake. You can use the AUTO (automatic) setting or
override the automatic operation with manual control
settings. The control settings will be remembered each
time you turn the ignition
off
and restart in the same
settings. You can use the Memory option to store and
recall your settings. (See “Memory” in the Index.)
Digital Display
The digital display shows readings in Fahrenheit or Celsius
by pressing the EM button (EnglisWMetric) on the Driver
Information Center @IC). When you
start
the vehicle, the
display will show the current fan speed, air delivery mode
and the driver-set temperature for approximately five
seconds and then show the outside temperature.
When the system is fully in the automatic mode, the
word AUTO will also appear on the display. If you have
selected a manual fan speed, then the fan symbol will
appear on the display.
If
a manual air delivery mode has
been selected, the delivery mode symbol will appear on
the display.
Driver Set Temperature
Knob
The DRIVER knob changes the temperature on the
driver’s and passenger’s side of the vehicle. Turn the
knob to the right to increase the temperature and to the
left to decrease the temperature. Whenever you turn this
knob, the temperature will be displayed for
approximately five seconds along with the current fan
speed and air delivery mode.
3-4
When adjusting the temperature, start with a driver-set
temperature of 73°F (23 "C) until you determine your
comfort zone. If you choose 60°F (16"C), the system
will remain at maximum cooling and will not
automatically adjust fan speed or air delivery. If you
choose 90°F (32"C), the system will remain at
maximum heating and will not automatically adjust fan
speed or air delivery. Choosing either maximum setting
will not cause the system to heat or cool any faster.
Turning the knob past either maximum setting has no
effect on the operation of the system.
Passenger Temperature Offset
The PASSENGER knob changes the temperature on the
passenger's side of the vehicle. When the knob is in the
12 o'clock position, the passenger's temperature is the
same as the driver's. Turn the knob to the right for
warmer air
on
the passenger's side, to the left for cooler
air. If the driver-set temperature is set at 60°F
(1
6
"
C) or
90
OF (32
"
C), turning the passenger knob has no effect
because the system is locked at a maximum setting.
Automatic Operation
Press the AUTO button to place the entire system in the
automatic mode. After a five second display of the
current settings, only the word AUTO and the outside
temperature will be shown on the digital display. The
system will operate to achieve your comfort set
temperature as quickly as possible. If you have set the
driver temperature at 60°F (16°C) or 90°F (32"C), the
system will not operate automatically until a different
temperature is selected. The AUTO control system
works best with the windows up and the removable roof
installed or the convertible top up.
A
Typical Cold Weather Example:
Your
vehicle has been parked outside overnight in cold
weather (below 32 OF/
0
"
C) and you have set the driver
temperature at 73°F (23°C) and have selected the AUTO
mode. The system will automatically adjust the
temperature output to maximum heating. The fan will start
at a low speed. This is to avoid blowing cold
air
into the
vehicle. The length of the delay depends on the amount of
time
since the engine was last started, the outside
temperature and the engine coolant temperature. As the
coolant warms up, the fan speed will gradually increase.
Air
will flow to the floor with some
air
to the windshield
to prevent fogging under most normal conditions.
3-5
As
the interior of the vehicle warms up to your comfort
set temperature, the fan speed will decrease and the
temperature output may become cooler.
If
the interior
temperature continues to warm up due to heating from
the sun or outside temperature increases, the system
may switch to other air delivery modes (typically
DEFOG or BI-LEVEL).
A
ljpical Hot Weather Example:
Your
vehicle has been parked outside all day in hot
weather (above
7OoF/
21
O
C)
and you have set the driver
temperature at
73
OF
(23
"C)
and have selected the
AUTO
mode. The system will automatically adjust the
temperature output to maximum cooling. The blower
will start at a low speed momentarily to push the hot air
to the floor of the vehicle and then go to a higher blower
speed with cold airflow out of the instrument panel
outlets.
A
small amount of airflow will continue through
the lower ducts to cool the
floor
area.
The air intake may start in the recirculated mode for
maximum cooling performance.
As
the interior
of
the
vehicle cools down to your comfort set temperature, the
fan speed will decrease and the temperature output may
become warmer. The air intake may shift from
recirculation to fresh air mode.
If
the interior continues
to cool due to a decrease,,,in the amount of heat the
vehicle is absorbing from the sun or a decrease
in
the
outside temperature, the system could switch to other air
delivery modes (typically BI-LEVEL or DEFOG).
Manual Settings
With the Dual Zone Electronic Climate Control, there
are several manual settings you can use to control the
system and override the
AUTO
operation. You can
program the fan speed,
air
delivery mode, air intake
mode and control the air conditioning operation using
these settings. The system will still determine the
temperature output level based on the driver-set
temperature and the passenger temperature offset.
%
FAN
SPEED:
Press the button with the fan switch
on it to manually lock
in
the current fan speed and to
stop the automatic fan speed control. Pressing the
arrows will delete
AUTO
from the digital display. The
fan graphics with the fan speed bars will be shown.
To
increase the fan speed
so
that more
air
flows into the
vehicle, press the
UP
arrow on the fan switch. To
decrease the fan speed and airflow, press the DOWN
arrow. The
AUTO
button must be pressed to return to
the automatic fan control.
MODE:
Press the MODE button to manually lock in the
current air delivery setting and to stop the automatic
mode control. Pressing the MODE button will delete
AUTO from the digital display and the mode graphics
will be shown. To change the setting, press the MODE
button again. The AUTO button must be pressed to
return to the automatic mode selection.
-bo
UPPER:
This setting directs most of the air
through the instrument panel outlets and a very small
amount to the lower outlets.
+#
BI-LEVEL:
This setting directs air into your
vehicle in two ways. Cooler air is directed toward your
upper body through the instrument panel outlets, while
warmer air is directed through the lower outlets.
+#
LOWER:
This
setting directs most of the air to
the floor area and some of it toward the windshield and
side window vents.
+’,
DEFOG:
This setting divides the
air
between
the windshield and lower outlets and a small amount
toward the side window vents. This is useful when fog
appears
on
the windshield or side glass due to rain or
snowy conditions.
+e
e
w.
Mode
Buttons
These buttons control climate control
OWOFF,
air
intake, front defrost, rear defrost and the air
conditioning operation.
OFF:
Press the
OFF
button to turn
off
the climate
control system.
This
is the only setting that fully shuts
off
the fan. The digital display will show only the
outside temperature. You can still adjust the driver set
temperature, the passenger temperature offset and the
air
intake mode while in
OFF.
a
A/C:
This button turns the
air
conditioning
compressor on or
off,
except in the FRONT defrost
mode. The light on the
A/C
button will come on when
the compressor is operating in either the automatic or
manual mode. The air conditioning may also be forced
off
at high engine speeds. The light on the
A/C
button
will flash
if
pressed when
air
conditioning operation is
not allowed.
3-7
FRESH
AIR:
Press this button to provide fresh
air from the outside. The light on this air intake button
will come on to show when it is operating. When in the
AUTO mode, the system automatically selects FRESH
AIR instead of RECIRCULATE, as required, to control
the temperature in the vehicle. By pressing FRESH
AIR, the system
will
lock into the fresh air mode. Any
adjustment to the air intake must then be made
manually.
FRESH
AIR should be used when trying to
defrost or defog windows to help reduce moisture inside
the vehicle.
RECIRCULATE:
Press this button to limit the
amount
of
fresh
air
entering the vehicle. The light on
this air intake button will come on to show when it is
operating. RECIRCULATE is helpful when you are
trying to cool the air quickly or trying to limit odors and
dust from entering the vehicle. When in the AUTO
mode, the system automatically selects RECIRCULATE
to cool the vehicle’s temperature. By pressing this
button, the system will lock into the recirculated air
mode. Any adjustment to the air intake must then be
made manually. The recirculated air mode is not allowed
in the front defrost or defog modes as fresh air helps
reduce moisture inside the vehicle.
FRONT:
Press the FRONT defrost button to
quickly remove fog or frost from the windshield. This
setting directs most of the airflow to the windshield and
a small amount toward the lower and side window
outlets. The light on the button will come
on
and the
digital display will show the defrost mode symbol and
fan speed when the front defrost mode is being used.
Pressing FRONT defrost again will return the system to
the last operating mode.
If the system is
in
FRONT defrost when you shut the
engine
off,
it will restart in FRONT defrost unless the
engine is off for longer than
40
minutes.
If
the engine is
off
longer than
40
minutes, the system
will
restart in the
operating mode you had set prior to FRONT defrost.
The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies air coming
into the vehicle. It also operates in defrost to help
remove moisture from the vehicle. The air conditioning
does not operate at temperatures below approximately
35°F to
40°F
(2°C to
4°C).
If the system is operating in
the AUTO mode, turning the air conditioning
off
will
delete AUTO from the digital display and show current
mode and fan settings. The AUTO button must be
pressed to return to the automatic mode operation.
3-8
Sensors
The Dual Zone Electronic Climate Control System
uses several sensors to control operation and
display information.
Solar Load Sensor
This sensor is located on the top right side of the
defroster grille. The defroster grille is on the top of the
instrument panel.
The sensor monitors the sun’s solar radiation and uses
this information as
part
of the automatic climate control
system when operating in the
AUTO
mode.
Be careful not to put anything over the sensor. It cannot
compensate for changes in the amount of heat the
vehicle is absorbing from the sun when covered.
Outside Air Temperature Sensor
This sensor is located
in
the air intake under the front
bumper of the vehicle. Information from this sensor
is used for the outside air temperature readings
shown on the digital display for the automatic climate
control system.
If the outside temperature goes up, the displayed
temperature will not change until:
The vehicle’s speed is above
20
mph
(32
km/h)
for
one and a half minutes.
0
The vehicle’s speed
is
above
45
mph
(72
km/h)
for
one minute.
These delays help prevent false readings. If the
temperature goes down, the outside temperature display
is updated immediately.
If
your vehicle has been turned
off
for more than
three hours, the current outside temperature will be
shown when you start the vehicle. If it has been turned
off for less than three hours, the temperature will be
recalled from the previous vehicle operation.
Inside Temperature Sensor
This sensor is located just left of the ignition switch.
The automatic climate control system uses this sensor
to receive information
so
if you block or cover it, the
system will not function properly.
3-9
Air Conditioning Heating
On very hot days, your vehicle will cool down more
quickly and economically if you open the windows long
enough to let hot inside
air
escape. Then keep your
windows closed in order to allow the air conditioning to
work best. Maximum cooling will occur when the
RECIRCULATE setting is operating, airflow direction is
in the upper mode, and the temperature control knob (on
a manual climate control system) is turned all the way to
the blue area. These settings will be selected by the
Automatic Electronic Dual Climate Control System if
operating in AUTO when maximum cooling is required.
When the air conditioning is on, you may sometimes
notice slight changes in your vehicle’s engine
performance and power. This is normal. The system is
designed to .help fuel economy while maintaining the
desired cooling level.
The
air
conditioning removes moisture from the air, so you
may notice water dripping fi-om under your vehicle when
it is idling or after it has been turned
off.
This is normal.
The heater works best
if
you keep your windows closed.
Maximum heating will occur when airflow direction is
in the lower mode and the temperature control knob (on
a manual climate control system) is all the way
in
the
red area. These settings will be selected by the
Automatic Electronic Dual Climate Control System if
operating in AUTO when maximum heating is required.
The BI-LEVEL setting is designed for use on sunny days
when the
air
is only moderately warm or cool. On days
like these, the sun may adequately warm your upper body,
but your lower body may not
be
warm enough. The
BI-LEVEL setting will direct cooler airflow to
your
upper
body and warmer
air
to
the
floor area.
If you have the optional engine coolant heater and use it
during cold weather
0°F
(-
18
“C) or lower, your heating
system will provide heat more quickly because the
coolant is already warmed. See “Engine Coolant Heater”
in the Index.
3-10
Rear Window Defogger
@
This button turns the rear defogger and heated
outside mirrors on. The light on the button will come
on when operating. The system automatically shuts
off
after approximately
10
minutes. If further defogging is
desired, press the button again.
The rear window defogger operates only when the
engine is running.
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
Do
not attach
anything like a temporary vehicle license or a decal
across the defogger grid on the rear window.
NOTICE:
Don’t use a razor blade or something sharp on
the inside
of
the rear window.
If
you do, you
could cut or damage the warming grid, and
repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Defogging and Defrosting
To
rapidly defrost the windshield, the FRONT defrost
mode (electronic dual climate control system) or defrost
mode (manual control system) should be used and the
fan speed should be adjusted to the highest speed. With
the manual control system, turn the temperature control
knob all the way to the red area.
To keep the windshield clear and provide heated air to
the floor area of the vehicle, use the
DEFOG
setting.
Your vehicle is equipped with side window defogger
vents located near the side rearview mirrors.
Ventilation System
Your vehicle’s flow-through ventilation system supplies
outside air into the vehicle when it is moving. Outside
air will also enter the vehicle when the fan is running.
Ventilation Tips
0
Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice, snow or
any other obstruction (such as leaves). The heater
and defroster will work far better, reducing the
chance of fogging the inside of the windows.
3-11
When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, turn the
blower fan to the highest speed for a few moments
before driving
off.
This helps clear the intake outlets
of snow and moisture, and reduces the chance of
fogging the inside of the windows.
Keep the area around the base of the center
instrument panel console and air path under the seats
clear of objects. This helps air circulate throughout
your vehicle.
Audio
Systems
Your Delco Electronics audio system has been designed
to operate easily and give years of listening pleasure.
You will get the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint
yourself with it first. Find out what your Delco
Electronics system can do and how to operate all its
controls, to be sure you're getting the most out of the
advanced engineering that went into it.
Setting the Clock for All Systems
Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears. Press
and hold
MN
until the correct minute appears.
AM-FM
Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
and Automatic Tone Control
Included with the
AM-FM
Stereo with Cassette Tape
Player and Automatic Tone Control, are six Bose@
amplified speakers. See your dealer for details.
Playing the Radio
PWR-VOL:
Press this knob to turn the system on and
off. To increase volume, turn the knob to the right. Turn
it to the left to decrease volume. The knob is capable of
rotating continuously.
RECALL:
Press this button to recall the station being
played. If you press the button when the ignition is
off,
the clock will show for a few seconds.
SCV:
Your system
has
a feature called
Speed-Compensated-Volume (SCV). With SCV, your
audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road
and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume at the
desired level. Move the control ring behind the upper
knob to the right to adjust the SCV. Then, as you drive,
SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary,
to overcome noise at any particular speed. The volume
level should always sound the same to you as you drive.
If you don’t want to use SCV, turn the control all the
way down. Each notch on the control ring allows for
more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
Finding a Station
AM-FM:
Press this button to switch between
AM,
FM1
and
FM2.
The display shows your selection.
TUNE:
Press this knob lightly
so
it extends. Turn it to
choose radio stations. Push the
knob
back into its stored
position when you’re not using it.
SEEK:
Press the right or left arrow to go to the
next higher
or
lower station. The sound will mute
while seeking.
SCAN:
Press one of the SEEK arrows for two seconds,
and SCAN will appear in the display. Use SCAN to
listen to stations for a few seconds. The radio will go to
a station, stop for a few seconds, then
go
on to the next
station. Press SEEK again to stop scanning. The sound
will mute while scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS:
The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18
stations (six AM, six
FM1
and six
FM2).
Just:
1.
Turn the radio on.
2.
Press
AM-FM
to select the band.
3.
Tune in the desired station.
4.
Press AUTO
TONE
to select the equalization that
best suits the type of station selected.
3-13
5.
6.
Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons. The
sound will mute. When it returns, release the button.
Whenever you press that numbered button, the
station you set will return and the AUTO TONE
equalization that you selected will also be
automatically selected for that button.
Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
P.SCAN:
Press this button to listen to each of your
favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons for a few
seconds. The radio will scan through each of the stations
stored on your pushbuttons, except those stations with
weak reception. The AUTO TONE setting stored for
that pushbutton will be automatically chosen. Press
P.SCAN or one of the pushbuttons again to stop
scanning. P.SCAN will be displayed whenever the tuner
is in the P.SCAN mode. The channel number (PI-P6)
will appear momentarily just before the frequency is
displayed. In
FM
mode, this function will scan through
both FM1 and
FM2
preset stations and
FM
1 or
€342
will
appear on the display.
Setting the Tone
BASS:
Press this knob lightly
so
it extends. Turn the
knob to the right to increase bass and to the left to
decrease bass. When you use this control, the radio’s
AUTO TONE setting will switch to manual and the
AUTO TONE display will
go
blank.
TREB:
Press this knob lightly
so
it extends. Turn the
knob to the right to increase treble and to the left to
decrease treble. When you use this control, the radio’s
AUTO TONE setting will switch to manual and the
AUTO TONE display will go blank.
If
a station is weak
or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
AUTO TONE:
This feature allows
you
to choose preset
bass and treble equalization settings designed for
country/western, classical, news, rock, pop and jazz
stations. C/W will appear on the display when you first
press AUTO TONE. Each time you press it, another
setting will appear on the display. Press it again after
JAZZ
appears and the AUTO
TONE
display will go
blank. Tone control will return to the BASS and TREB
knobs. Also, if you use the BASS and TREB knobs,
control will return to them and the AUTO
TONE
display will
go
blank.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL:
Press this knob lightly
so
it extends. Turn the
knob to the right for the right speakers and to the left for
the left speakers. The middle position balances the
sound between the speakers.
FADE:
Press this knob lightly
so
it extends. Turn the
knob to the right to adjust the sound to the front
speakers and to the left for the rear speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
30
to
45
minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than
that are
so
thin they may not work well in this player.
If
a
tape is inserted when the ignition is on but the radio is
off, the tape
will
begin playing. A tape symbol is shown
in the center of the graphic display whenever a tape is
inserted. When
a
tape is active, the tape symbol will be
accompanied by a direction arrow.
While the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUTO TONE,
BAL, FADE, BASS and TREB controls just as you do
for the radio. Other controls may have different
functions when a tape is inserted. The display will show
the tape symbol and an arrow to show which side of the
tape is playing.
If
you hear nothing or hear just a garbled sound, it may
not be in squarely. Press EJECT to remove the tape and
start over.
The player is able to detect a tight or broken tape, and
will eject the tape. The radio will go back to playing the
last station selected.
The player automatically senses the cassette for metal or
Cr02 and sets the pre-emphasis. Anytime a tape is
inserted, the top side is selected to play first.
PREV
(1):
Press this button or the left SEEK arrow to
go to the previous selection on the tape if the current
selection has been playing for less than eight seconds.
If
the PREV button is pressed and the current selection has
been playing for more than eight seconds, it will
go
to
the beginning of the current selection. Your tape must
have at least three seconds of silence between each
selection for PREV or SEEK to work. The tape direction
arrow blinks during PREV or SEEK operation. The
sound will mute during PREV or SEEK operation. Press
this button or one of the SEEK arrows again to return to
normal play.
3-15
PROG
(2):
Press this button to play the other side of
the tape.
NEXT
(3):
Press this button or the right SEEK arrow to
go to the next selection on the tape. If you hold the
button or press it more than once, the player will
continue moving forward through the tape. Your tape
must have at least three seconds of silence between each
selection for
NEXT
or
SEEK
to work. The tape
direction arrow blinks during
NEXT
or SEEK operation.
The sound will mute during
NEXT
or
SEEK
operation.
Press this button or one of the SEEK arrows again to
return to normal play.
REV
(4):
Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly.
Press it again to return to playing speed. The radio will
play the last-selected station while the tape reverses.
flu
(5):
Press this button to reduce background
noise. Note that the double-D symbol will appear
on the display.
Dolby@ Noise Reduction is manufactured under a
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
FWD
(6):
Press this button to advance quickly to
another part of the tape. Press the button again to return
to playing speed. The radio will play the last-selected
station while the tape advances.
AM-FM:
Press this button to play the radio when a tape
is
in the player.
TAPE AUX:
Press this button to change to the tape
function when the radio is on. The tape symbol with an
arrow will appear on the display when the tape is active.
If
your system is equipped with
a
remote playback
device, pressing this button a second time will allow the
remote device to play.
EJECT:
Press this button to remove the tape. The radio
will play. EJECT may be activated with either the
ignition or radio off. Cassettes may be loaded
with
the
radio
off
if this button is pressed first.
If
you leave
a
cassette tape in the player while listening to the radio, it
may become warm.
CLN:
If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs
to
be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care
of
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After
you
clean
the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to
reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display
---
to
show the indicator was reset.
3-16
CD
Adapter
Kits
It is possible to use a CD adapter kit with your cassette
tape player after activating the bypass feature on your
tape player.
To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:
1.
Turn the ignition on.
2.
Turn the radio off.
3.
Press TAPE
AUX
and hold for five seconds.
4.
After five seconds, the tape symbol on the display
will flash. While the symbol
is
flashing, insert the
adapter. The radio will turn on. The CD player will
work now.
This override feature
will
remain active until EJECT
is pressed.
AM-FM
Stereo with Compact Disc Player
and Automatic Tone Control
(If
Equipped)
Included with the AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc
Player and Automatic Tone Control,
are
six
Base@
amplified speakers. See your dealer for details.
3-17
Playing the Radio
PWR-VOL:
Press this knob to turn the system on and
off.
To increase volume, turn the knob to the right. Turn
it to the left to decrease volume. The knob is capable of
rotating continuously.
RECALL:
Press this button to recall the station being
played. If you press the button when the ignition is off,
the clock will show for a few seconds.
SCV:
Your system has a feature called
Speed-Compensated-Volume (SCV). With SCV, your
audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road
and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume at the
desired level. Move the control ring behind the upper
knob to the right to adjust the SCV. Then, as you drive,
SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary,
to overcome noise at any particular speed. The volume
level should always sound the same to you as you drive.
If you don’t want to use SCV, turn the control all the
way down. Each notch on the control ring allows for
more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
Finding a Station
AM-FM:
Press this button to switch between
AM,
FM1
and
FM2.
The display shows your selection.
TUNE:
Press this knob lightly
so
it extends.
Turn
it to
choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored
position when you’re not using it.
SEEK:
Press the right or left arrow to go to the
next higher or lower station. The sound will mute
while seeking.
SCAN:
Press one of the
SEEK
arrows for two seconds,
and SCAN will appear on the display. Use
SCAN
to
listen to stations for a few seconds. The radio will
go
to
a station, stop for a few seconds, then go on to the next
station. Press
SEEK
again to stop scanning. The sound
will mute while scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS:
The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18
stations (six
AM,
six FM1 and six
FM2).
Just:
1. Turn the radio
on.
2.
Press
AM-FM
to select the band.
3.
Tune in the desired station.
4.
Press AUTO TONE to select the equalization that
best suits the type of station selected.
3-18
5.
Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons. The
sound will mute. When it returns, release the button.
Whenever you press that numbered button, the
station you set will return and the AUTO TONE
equalization that you selected will also be
automatically selected for that button.
6.
Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
P.SCAN:
Press this button to listen to each of your
favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons for a few
seconds. The radio will scan through each of the stations
stored on your pushbuttons, except those stations with
weak reception. The AUTO TONE setting stored for
that pushbutton will be automatically chosen. Press
P.SCAN or one of the pushbuttons again to stop
scanning. P.SCAN will be displayed whenever the tuner
is in the P.SCAN mode. The channel number (Pl-P6)
will appear momentarily just before the frequency is
displayed, In
FM
mode, this function will scan through
both
FM1
and
FM2
preset stations and FMl or
FM2
will
appear on the display.
Setting the Tone
BASS:
Press this knob lightly
so
it extends. Turn the
knob to the right to increase bass and to the left to
decrease bass. When you use this control, the radio’s
AUTO TONE setting will switch to manual and the
AUTO TONE display will go blank.
TREB:
Press this knob lightly
so
it extends.
Turn
the
knob to the right to increase treble and to the left to
decrease treble. When you use this control, the radio’s
AUTO TONE setting will switch to manual and the
AUTO TONE display will go blank.
If
a station is weak
or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
AUTO
TONE:
This feature allows you to choose preset
bass and treble equalization settings designed for
country/western, classical, news, rock, pop and jazz
stations.
C/W
will appear on the display when you first
press AUTO TONE. Each time you press it, another
setting will appear on the display. Press it again after
JAZZ appears and the AUTO TONE display will go
blank. Tone control will return to the BASS and TREB
knobs. Also, if you use the BASS and TREB knobs,
control will return to them and the AUTO TONE
display will go blank.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL:
Press this knob lightly
so
it extends. Turn the
knob to the right for the right speakers and to the left for
the left speakers. The middle position balances the
sound between the speakers.
3-19
FADE:
Press this knob lightly
so
it extends. Turn the
knob to the right to adjust the sound to the front
speakers and to the left for the rear speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
Playing a Compact Disc
Insert
a
disc partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in. The disc should begin playing. The
display will show
CD
and the CD symbol. If you want
to insert a compact disc with the ignition off, first press
RECALL or EJECT.
If you’re driving on a very rough road or if it’s very hot,
the disc may not play and
ERR
(error) may appear on
the display. Press RECALL to take ERR
off
the display.
When things get back to normal, the disc should play. If
the disc comes out, it could be that:
The disc is upside down.
It is dirty, scratched or wet.
0
It is very humid. (If
so,
wait about an hour and
try again.)
PREV
(1):
Press this button or the left
SEEK
arrow to
go to the previous track if the current selection has been
playing for less than eight seconds. If the
PREV
button
is pressed and the current selection has been playing for
more than eight seconds, it will go to the beginning
of
the current selection.
If
you hold the button or press it
more than once, the player will continue moving back
through the disc. The sound will mute while seeking.
RDM
(2):
Press this button to hear the tracks in random,
rather than sequential, order.
RANDOM
will show on
the display. Press
RDM
again to
turn
off
random play.
RDM
is reset to off when the disc is ejected.
NEXT
(3):
Press this button or the right
SEEK
arrow to
go to the next track.
If
you hold the button or press it more
than once,
the
player will continue moving forward
through the disc. The sound
will
mute while seeking.
REV
(4):
Press and hold this button to quickly reverse
within a track. Release it to play the passage. You can
use the counter reading on the display to locate a
passage more easily.
FWD
(6):
Press and hold this button to advance quickly
within a track. Release it to resume playing. You can
use the counter reading on the display to locate a
passage easily.
3-20
RECALL:
Press this button to see which track is
playing. Press it again within five seconds to see how
long it has been playing (elapsed time). The track
number also appears when you change the volume or
when a new track starts to play.
AM-FM:
Press this button to play the radio when a disc
is in the player. The letters
CD
will go off the display.
CD
AUX:
Press this button to change to the disc
function when the radio is on.
A
CD
icon will appear on
the display when the disc is in the player, whether it is
active or not. If your system is equipped with a remote
playback device, pressing this button a second time will
allow the remote device to play.
EJECT
Press this button
to
remove the disc. The radio
will play. The disc will start at the first track when you
reinsert it.
If
you turn off the ignition or radio with a disc in the
player, it will stay in the player. When you turn on the
ignition or system, the disc will start playing where it
was stopped. If you press EJECT but don’t remove
the disc, the player will pull the disc back in to protect
it after about one minute. If you leave a compact disc
in the player while listening to the radio, it may
become warm.
Trunk Mounted CD Changer
(If
Equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a trunk mounted CD
changer. It is located in the rear center storage
compartment. See “Rear Storage” in the Index for more
information.
With the optional compact disc changer, you can play up
to
12
discs continuously. Normal size discs may be
played using the trays supplied in the magazine. The
small discs
(8
cm) can be played only with specially
designed trays.
3-21
NOTICE:
Heavy objects in the center storage area which
may shift
or
slide while driving could damage
your
CD
changer. Protect your
CD
changer by
not placing heavy, moveable objects in the center
storage area.
You must first load the magazine with discs before you
can play a compact disc. Each
of
the 12 trays holds one
disc. Press the button on the back of the magazine and
pull gently on one of the trays. Load the trays from
bottom to top, placing a disc on the tray label side down.
If
you load a disc label side up, the disc will not play
and an error will occur. Gently push the tray back into
the magazine slot. Repeat this procedure for loading up
to 12 discs in the magazine.
Once you have loaded the discs in the magazine, slide
open
the
door of the compact disc (CD) changer. Push
the magazine into the changer in the direction of the
arrow marked on top of the magazine.
Close the door by sliding it all the way to the left.
If
the
door is left partially open, the changer will not operate
and an error will occur. When the door is closed, the
changer will begin checking for discs in the magazine.
This will continue for up to two minutes depending on
the number of discs loaded.
To eject the magazine from the player, slide the CD
changer door all the way open. The magazine will
automatically eject. Remember to keep the door closed
whenever possible to keep dirt and dust from getting
inside the changer.
Whenever a CD magazine with discs is loaded in the
changer, the CD symbol will appear on the radio display.
If the CD changer is checking the magazine for CDs, the
CD symbol will flash on the display until the changer is
ready to play. When
a
CD begins playing, a disc and
track number will be displayed. The disc numbers are
listed on the front of the magazine.
If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo
with Cassette Tape Player and Automatic Tone Control,
the following buttons are used for the trunk mounted
CD changer except the EJECT button for ejecting the
CD magazine.
PREV
(1):
Press this button or the SEEK left arrow to
go to the previous track if the current selection has been
playing for less than eight seconds. If the PREV button
is pressed and the current selection has been playing for
more than eight seconds, it will go to the beginning of
the current selection. If you hold or press this button
more than once, the player will continue moving back
through the disc. The sound will mute while seeking.
PROG
(2):
Press this button to select a disc. The disc
number and track number will be displayed.
NEXT
(3):
Press this button or the SEEK right arrow to
go to the next track.
If
you hold the button or press it more
than once, the player will continue moving forward
through the disc. The sound will mute while seeking.
REV
(4):
Press and hold this button to reverse quickly
through a track selection. Release it to resume playing.
FWD
(6):
Press and hold this button to advance quickly
through a track selection. Release it to resume playing.
SEEK:
Press the right arrow to seek to the next
selection
on
the CD. Press the left arrow to search for
the previous selection on the CD. The sound will mute
while seeking.
P.SCAN:
Press this button to hear the tracks in random,
rather than sequential, order.
RANDOM
will appear on
the display. Press P.SCAN again to turn
off
random play.
TAPE AUX:
Press this button
if
you have a disc loaded
in the changer and the radio is turned on, to play a
compact disc. Press AM-FM to return to the radio when
a
compact disc is playing. Press TAPE AUX to switch
between the tape and compact disc if both are loaded.
To eject the disc holder in the trunk mounted CD
changer, slide the CD changer door all the way open and
the disc holder will automatically eject.
If
your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo with
CD Player and Automatic Tone Control, the following
buttons are used for the trunk mounted CD changer
except the EJECT button for ejecting the CD magazine.
3-23
PREV
(1):
Press this button or the SEEK left arrow to
go to the previous track
if
the current selection has been
playing for less than eight seconds. If the PREV button
is pressed and the current selection has been playing for
more than eight seconds, it
will
go to the beginning of
the current selection.
If
you hold or press this button
more than once, the player will continue moving back
through the disc. The sound will mute while seeking.
RDM
(2):
Press this button to hear the tracks in random,
rather than sequential, order. RANDOM will appear on
the display. Press RDM again to turn
off
random play.
NEXT
(3):
Press
this
button or the SEEK right arrow to
go to the next track.
If
you hold the button or press it more
than once, the player
will
continue moving forward
through the disc. The sound will mute while seeking.'
REV
(4):
Press and hold this button to reverse quickly
through a track selection. Release it to resume playing.
(5):
Press this button to select a disc. The disc number
and track number will be displayed.
FWD
(6):
Press and hold
this
button to advance quickly
through a track selection. Release it to resume playing.
SEEK:
Press the right arrow to seek to the next
selection on the CD. Press the left arrow to search for
the previous selection on the CD. The sound will mute
while seeking.
CD AUX:
Press this button
if
you have a disc loaded in
the changer and the radio
is
turned on, to play a compact
disc. Press AM-FM to return to the radio when a
compact disc is playing. Press CD
AUX
to switch
between the trunk mounted CD changer and compact
disc
if
both are loaded.
To
eject the disc holder
in
the trunk mounted CD
changer, slide the CD changer door all the way open and
the disc holder will automatically eject.
Compact Disc Changer Errors
If an error occurs while trying to play a CD in the
compact disc changer, the following conditions may
have caused the error:
0
0
0
0
The road is too rough. The disc should play when the
road is smoother.
The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or loaded label
side up.
The air is very humid. If
so,
wait about
an
hour and
try again.
The CD changer door is open. Completely close the
changer door to restore normal operation.
An empty magazine is inserted in the CD changer.
Try the magazine again with a disc loaded on one of
the trays.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, please contact your dealer.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK" is designed to discourage theft of your
radio. It works by using a secret code to disable all radio
functions whenever battery power is removed.
The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be used or
ignored.
If
ignored, the system plays normally and the
radio is not protected by the feature. If THEFTLOCK is
activated, your radio will not operate if stolen.
When THEFTLOCK is activated, the radio will display
LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery
power has been interrupted. If your battery loses power
for any reason, you must unlock the radio with the secret
code before it will operate.
Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature
The instructions which follow explain how to enter your
secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system. It is
recommended that you read through
all
nine steps
before starting the procedure.
NOTE: If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse
between any steps, the radio automatically reverts to
time and you must start the procedure over at Step
4.
1. Write down any three or four-digit number from
000
to
1999
and keep it in a safe place separate
from the vehicle.
2.
Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or ON.
3.
Turn the radio
off.
4.
Press the
1
and
4
buttons together. Hold them down
until
---
shows
on
the display. Next you will use the
secret code number which you have written down.
5. Press MN and
000
will appear on the display.
6.
Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
7.
Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
8.
Press
AM-FM
after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show REP to let you know that you
need to repeat Steps
5
through
7
to confirm your
secret code.
9.
Press AM-FM and this time the display will show
SEC to let you know that your radio is secure. The
indicator by the volume control will begin flashing
when the ignition is turned
off.
Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After a
Power
Loss
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15
seconds between steps:
1.
LOC appears when the ignition is on.
2.
Press MN and
000
will appear on the display.
3.
Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
with your code.
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show SEC, indicating the radio is
now operable and secure.
4.
Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
5.
Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
If
you enter the wrong code eight times, INOP will
appear on the display. You will have to wait an hour
with the ignition on before you can try again. When you
try again, you will only have three chances to enter the
correct code before INOP appears.
If
you lose or forget your code, contact your dealer.
Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature
1.
Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or ON.
2.
Turn the radio
off.
3.
Press the
1
and
4
buttons together. Hold them down
4.
Press MN and
000
will appear on the display.
5.
Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
6.
Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
until SEC shows on the display.
with your code.
with your code.
7.
Press
AM-FM
after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show
---,
indicating that the radio is
no longer secured.
If the code entered is incorrect, SEC will appear on the
display. The radio will remain secured until the correct
code is entered.
When battery power is removed and later applied to a
secured radio, the radio won’t turn on and LOC will
appear on the display.
To unlock a secured radio, see “Unlocking the
Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Power
Loss”
earlier in
this section.
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15
seconds between steps:
3-26
Understanding Radio Reception
AM
The range for most
AM
stations is greater than for
FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other.
AM
can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.
FM
Stereo
FM
stereo will give you the best sound, but
FM
signals
will reach only about 10
to
40
miles (16 to
65
km).
Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with
FM
signals, causing
the sound to come and go.
Tips
About
Your
Audio System
Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable
until it is too late. Your hearing can adapt to higher
volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be loud
and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions by
adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe
sound level before your hearing adapts to it.
To help avoid hearing loss or damage:
Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.
Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably
and clearly.
NOTICE:
Before you add any sound equipment to your
vehicle
--
like
a
tape player,
CB
radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio
--
be sure you can
add what you want.
If
you can, it’s very
important to do
it
properly. Added sound
equipment may interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s engine, Delco Electronics radio or
other systems, and even damage them. Your
vehicle’s systems may interfere with the
operation of sound equipment that has been
added improperly.
So,
before adding sound equipment, check with
your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules
covering mobile radio and telephone units.
3-27
Care
of
Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and
extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50
hours of use. Your radio may display CLN to indicate
that you have used your tape player for
50
hours without
resetting the tape clean timer. If this message appears on
the display, your cassette tape player needs to be
cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as
soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and
player.
If
you notice a reduction in sound quality, try a
known good cassette to see
if
it is the tape or the tape
player at fault.
If
this other cassette has no improvement
in sound quality, clean the tape player.
Cleaning may be done with a scrubbing action,
non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub
the tape head as the hubs
of
the cleaner cassette turn. It
is normal for the cassette to eject while cleaning. Insert
the cassette at least three times to ensure thorough
cleaning.
A
scrubbing action cleaning cassette is
available through your dealership.
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean
the tape head.
This
type of cleaning cassette will not
eject and, it may not clean as thoroughly as the
scrubbing type cleaner.
After you clean the player, press and hold
EJECT
for
five
seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio
will
display
---
to show the indicator was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette
tape
is
in good condition before you have your tape
player serviced.
Care
of
Your Compact
Discs
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust.
If
the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and
clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling
discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the
edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Care
of
Your Compact Disc Player
The use of
CD
lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to
the risk
of
contaminating the lens of the
CD
optics with
lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
Power
Antenna Mast Care (Option)
Your
power antenna will look its best and work well
if it’s cleaned from time to time. To clean the
*
antenna mast:
1.
Turn on the ignition and radio to raise the antenna.
2.
Dampen a clean cloth with mineral spirits or
3.
Wipe the cloth over the mast sections, removing
equivalent solvent.
any dirt.
4.
Wipe dry with a clean cloth.
5.
Make the antenna
go
up and down by turning the
radio or ignition
off
and on.
6.
Repeat
if
necessary.
-...
.
...
3-29
I
NOTICE:
Don’t lubricate the power antenna. Lubrication
could damage it.
I
NOTICE:
Before entering an automatic car wash, turn
off
your radio to make the power antenna go down.
This
will
prevent the mast from possibly getting
damaged.
If
the antenna does not go down when
you turn the radio
off,
it may be damaged or
need to be cleaned. In either case, lower the
antenna by hand by carefully pressing the
~
antenna down.
If
the mast portion
of
your antenna is damaged, you can
easily replace it. See your dealer for a replacement kit
and follow the instructions in the kit.
Integrated Windshield and Rear Window
Antennas (Option)
The antennas in your vehicle are located in the
windshield and the rear window. The connectors are at
the top of the windshield and the top
of
the rear window
above the rear window defogger.
3-30
.
b%
NOTES
3-31
fi
NOTES
Section
4
Your
Driving and
the
Road
Here you’ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve also
included many other useful tips on driving.
4-2
4-2
4-5
4-6
4-10
4- 12
4-
12
4-13
4-15
Defensive Driving
Drunken Driving
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
Steering
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
Loss
of Control
Driving at Night
4- 16
4- 19
4-20
4-2
1
4-22
4-22
4-24
4-29
4-30
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
City Driving
Freeway Driving
Before Leaving
on
a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Winter Driving
Loading Your Vehicle
Towing
A
Trailer
4-1
Defensive Driving
The
best advice anyone can give about driving
is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
Corvette: Buckle up. (See “Safety Belts” in the Index.)
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might
do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions
are
about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough
following distance. It’s the best defensive driving
maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never
know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake
or turn suddenly.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to
the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive
a vehicle:
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness.
4-2
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol.
In
most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking
and driving.
In
recent years, over 17,000 annual motor
vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use
of alcohol, with more than
300,000
people injured.
Many adults
--
by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population
--
choose never to drink alcohol,
so
they
never drive after drinking. For persons under
21,
it’s
against the law in every
U.S.
state to drink alcohol.
There
are
good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to solve this highway safety problem
is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive. But
what if people do? How much is “too much” if the
hver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many might
think. Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC)
of
someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
0
The amount
of
alcohol consumed
0
The drinker’s body weight
0
The amount
of
food that is consumed before and
during drinking
The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
According to the American Medical Association, a
180-lb.
(82
kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce
(355
ml)
bottles
of
beer in an hour will end up with a
BAC of about
0.06
percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4-ounce (120
ml)
glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks
if
each had
1-
1/2 ounces
(45
ml)
of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.
4-3
It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,
if
the same person drank three double martinis
(3
ounces
or
90
ml
of
liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to
0.12
percent. A person who
consumes food just before
or
during drinking will have
a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have
a lower relative percentage
of
body water than men.
Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means that a
woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a
man of her same body weight when each has the same
number
of
drinks.
The law in many
U.S.
states sets the legal limit at a BAC
of
0.10
percent. In a growing number of
U.S.
states, and
throughout Canada, the limit is
0.08
percent.
In
some
other countries, it’s even lower. The BAC limit for
all
commercial drivers in the United States is
0.04
percent.
The BAC will be over
0.10
percent after three to
six
drinks
(in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how
quickly the person drinks them.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC
of
0.10
percent. Research shows that the driving
skills
of
many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05
percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above
0.05
percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in
a
collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC
of
0.05
percent or above.
A
driver with a BAC level
of
0.06
percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of
0.10
percent, the chance of
this driver having a collision is
12
times greater;
at
a
level of
0.15
percent, the chance is
25
times greater!
The body takes about
an
hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink.
No
amount of coffee or number
of
cold
showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the
right answer. What
if
there’s an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able
to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There’s something else about drinking and driving that
many people don’t know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or
heart.
This
means that when anyone who has been
drinking
--
driver or passenger
--
is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than
if
the person had not been drinking.
Drinking and then driving
is
very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and
judgment can be affected
by
even
a
small amount
of
alcohol. You can have
a
serious
--
or even
fatal
--
collision
if
you drive after drinking.
Please don’t drink and drive or ride with
a
driver
who
has been drinking. Ride home in
a
cab; or
if
you’re with a group, designate a driver who will
not drink.
Control
of
a
Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle
go
where
you want it to
go.
They are the brakes, the steering and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work
at the places where the tires meet the road.
Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s
easy
to
ask more
of
those control systems
than
the tires
and road can provide. That means you can lose control
of
your vehicle.
4-5
Braking
Braking action involves
perception time
and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That’s
perception time.
Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That’s
reaction time.
Average
reaction time
is about 314 of a second. But
that’s only an average. It might be less with one driver
and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all play a part.
So
do alcohol,
drugs
and
frustration. But even
in
3/4 of a second, a vehicle
moving at
60
mph
(
100
km/h)
travels
66
feet
(20
m).
That could be
a
lot of distance in an emergency,
so
keeping enough space between your vehicle and others
is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement or
gravel); the condition
of
the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of the
vehicle and the amount
of
brake force applied.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts
--
heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking
--
rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a
mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between
hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster
if
you
do
a
lot
of
heavy braking. If you keep pace with the
traffic and allow realistic following distances, you will
eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake
normally but don’t pump your brakes.
If
you do, the
pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But
you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is
used up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal
will be harder to push.
e.
?
.
..
,.
Anti-Lock
Brakes
(ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes (ABS). ABS is an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking slud.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You may
hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test
is going on, and you may even notice that your brake
pedal moves a little. This is normal.
If there’s a problem with the
anti-lock brake system, this
warning light will stay on.
See “Anti-Lock Brake
System Warning Light” in
the Index.
Here’s how anti-lock works. Let’s say the road
is
wet.
You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animal jumps out in
front
of
you.
You slam on the brakes. Here’s what happens with ABS.
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one
of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will
separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at
both rear wheels.
4-7
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure faster
than
any driver could. The computer is programmed to
make the most of available
tire
and road conditions.
You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
As
you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need
to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, you won’t have time to apply your brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have
anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may hear a
motor or clicking noise and feel the brake pedal move
a
little during a stop, but this is normal.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Your vehicle has a traction control system called TCS
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it
senses that the rear wheels are spinning too much or are
beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the
system works the rear brakes and reduces engine power
(by closing the throttle and managing engine spark) to
limit wheel spin.
The TRACTION SYSTEM ACTIVE message will
come on when the TCS system
is
limiting wheel spin.
See “TRACTION SYSTEM ACTIVE Message” in the
Index. You may feel or hear the system working, but this
is normal.
4-8
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the TCS system
begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will
automatically disengage. When road conditions allow
you to safely use it again, you may re-engage the cruise
control. (See “Cruise Control” in the Index.)
The SERVICE TRACTION
SYSTEM message and the
TCS warning light will
come on to let you know if
there’s
a
problem with your
TCS system.
See
“SERVICE TRACTION
SYSTEM Message” in
the Index.
The TCS system automatically comes on whenever you
start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin, especially in
slippery road conditions, you should always leave the
system
on.
But you can turn the TCS system
off
if you
ever need to.
To turn the system
off,
press
the button located on the
console.
You
can turn the
system ON
or
OFF
at any
time by pressing the TCS
switch. The DIC will
display the appropriate
message when you push
the button.
f
When this light and the SERVICE TRACTION
SYSTEM message are on, the system will not limit
wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time.
In
many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.
4-9
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system
is
not functioning, you can steer
but it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
Driving
on
Curves
It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A
lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here’s why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The
traction
of
the tires against the road surface makes it
possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn
the front wheels.
If
there’s no traction, inertia will keep
the vehicle going in the same direction. If you’ve ever
tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this.
The traction you can get
in
a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which
the
curve is banked, and your speed.
While
you’re
in
a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems
--
steering and acceleration
--
have to do
their work where the tires meet the road. Adding the
sudden acceleration can demand too much of those
places.
You
can lose control. Refer to “Traction Control
System’’ in the Index.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the
accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the
way
you want it
to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are
based on good weather and road conditions. Under less
favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before
you
enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed
so
you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective than
bralung. For example, you come over a
hill
and find a
truck stopped
in
your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
fiom nowhere, or a chdd
darts
out fiom between parked
cars and stops right
in
fiont of you. You can avoid these
problems by braking
--
if
you can stop
in
time. But
sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room. That’s the time for
evasive action
--
steering around the problem.
Your
vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes. (See “Braking in
Emergencies” earlier in this section.)
It
is better to
remove
as
much speed as you can from a possible
collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or
right depending on the space available. An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision.
If
you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended
9
and
3
o’clock positions, you can
turn it a full
180
degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at
all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-11
Off-Road
Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped
off
the
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving.
/
/d
FewLEFT
APPROX.
QUARTERTURN
If
the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy.
Ease
off
the
accelerator and then,
if
there is nothing in the way, steer
so
that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement. You
can
turn
the steering wheel up to one-quarter
turn
until the
right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then
turn
your
steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes
back into the right lane again.
A
simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds.
A
miscalculation,
an
error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can
suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents
--
the head-on collision.
So
here are some tips for passing:
0
“Drive ahead.”
Look
down the road, to the sides and to
crossroads for situations that might affect your passing
patterns.
If
you have any doubt whatsoever about
making a successful pass, wait for a better time.
Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines.
If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate
a
turn or
an
intersection, delay your pass.
A
broken
center line usually indicates it’s all right to pass
(providing
the
road ahead is clear). Never cross a solid
line on your side of the lane or a double solid line,
even
if
the road
seems
empty of approaching traffic.
0
0
0
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one
thmg, following too closely reduces your area of
vision, especially if you’re following a larger
vehicle. Also, you won’t have adequate space if the
vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a
reasonable distance.
When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don’t
get too close. Time your move
so
you will be
increasing speed
as
the time comes to move into the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a
“running start” that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens
to
cause you to cancel your pass,
you need only slow down and drop back again and
wait for another opportunity.
If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait
your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying to
pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle.
Remember to glance over your shoulder and check
the blind spot.
0
0
0
0
Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back intu the right lane. (Remember that
your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you
just passed may seem to be farther away from you
than it really is.)
Try
not to pass more than one vehicle at a time
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may
be slowing down or starting to turn.
If you’re being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you
can ease a little to the right.
Loss
of
Control
Let’s review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering
and acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the
tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked.
In
any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer and
constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger.
Skidding
In
a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not “overdriving”
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and
lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too
much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot
off
the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid
only the acceleration skid.
If
your
TCS
system is
off,
then an acceleration slud
is also best handled by easing your foot
off
the
accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot
off
the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the
vehicle to
go.
If
you start steering quickly enough, your
vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a
second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll
want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or
braking (including engine braking by shifting to a lower
gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide.
You may not realize the surface is slippery until your
vehicle
is
skidding.
Learn
to recognize warning clues
--
such as enough water, ice or packed snow on the road to
make a “mirrored surface”
--
and slow down when you
have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system
(ABS)
helps
avoid only the braking skid.
4-14
Driving
at
Night
0
0
0
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired
--
by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
Drive defensively.
0
0
0
Don't drink and drive.
Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
Since you can't see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles.
Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only
so
much road ahead.
In remote areas, watch for animals.
If you're tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
Night
Vision
No
one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as
we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old
driver may require at least twice as much light to see the
same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you
do
in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you
are
wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will
have less trouble adjusting to night. But
if
you're
driving, don't wear sunglasses at night. They may cut
down on glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot
of things invisible.
4-15
You
can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When you
are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who
doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring
directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean
--
inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build
up
a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it’s easier
to
pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim,
so
should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
blindness
--
the inability to see in dim light
--
and
aren’t even aware
of
it.
Driving in Rain and on
Wet
Roads
4-16
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can’t stop, accelerate
or
turn as well because
your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on
dry
roads.
And,
if
your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get
even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and be
cautious
if
rain starts to fall while you are driving. The
surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes
are
tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain
can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals,
pavement markings, the edge of the road and even
people walking.
It’s wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in
good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled
with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper
inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems, too.
The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles.
But if you can’t, try
to
slow down before you hit them.
4-17
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t work
as
well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to
one side. You could lose control
of
the vehicle.
After
driving through
a
large puddle
of
water or
a
car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until
your brakes work normally.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous.
So
much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the water.
This can happen
if
the road is wet enough and you’re
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,
it has little or no contact with the road.
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or
more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on
the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone
poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the
water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The
best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
NOTICE:
If
you drive too quickly through deep puddles or
standing water, water can come in through your
engine’s
air
intake and badly damage your
engine. Never drive through water that
is
slightly
lower than the underbody
of
your vehicle.
If
you
can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive
through them very slowly.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
0
Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room
ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted
by road spray.
“Tires” in the Index.)
0
Have good tires with proper tread depth. (See
City
Driving
One of the biggest problems with city streets
is
the
amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
0
0
0
Know the best way to get to where you are going. Get
a city map and plan your
trip
into an unknown
part
of
the city just
as
you would for
a
cross-country
trip.
Try
to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most
large cities. You’ll save time and energy. (See the
next
part,
“Freeway Driving.”)
Treat a green light as a warning signal.
A
traffic
light is
there because the corner is busy enough to need it.
When a light
turns
green, and just before you
start
to
move, check both ways for vehicles that have not
cleared the intersection or may be
running
the red light.
4-19
Freeway Driving
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways)
are
the safest
of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same
speed most of the other drivers
are
driving. Too-fast or
too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the
left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway
as
you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to
check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to
blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to
the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check
your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you
are
on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate
if
it’s slower. Stay
in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in your
“blind” spot.
Once you
are
moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move
slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the proper
lane well
in
advance.
If
you
miss
your exit, do not,
under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive on to
the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense
of
motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going
slower than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested.
If
you
must start when you’re not fresh
--
such as after a day’s
work
--
don’t plan to make too many miles that first part
of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you
can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip?
If
you keep it
serviced and maintained, it’s ready
to
go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you’ll find experienced and able service experts in
GM
dealerships all across North America. They’ll be ready
and willing to help if you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Windshield Washer Fluid:
Is
the reservoir full? Are
all windows clean inside and outside?
Wiper Blades:
Are they in good shape?
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids:
Have you checked
all levels?
Lamps:
Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
Tires:
They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip.
Is
the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
Weather Forecasts:
What’s the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a short’
time to avoid a major storm system?
Maps:
Do
you have up-to-date maps?
4-21
Highway Hypnosis
Is
there actually such a condition
as
“highway hypnosis”?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel?
Call
it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with the
same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the road,
the drone
of
the engine, and the rush of the wind against
the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t let it happen
to you!
If
it does, your vehicle can leave the road in
less
than
a
second,
and you could crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
0
0
0
Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and to
the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
If you get sleepy, pull
off
the road into a rest, service
or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise, or
both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway as
an emergency.
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
If
you drive regularly
in
steep country, or if you’re
planning to visit there, here
are
some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
0
0
Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system and
transmission. These
parts
can work hard on
mountain roads.
Know how to
go
down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of the
slowing down. Shft to a lower gear when you
go
down a steep or long hill.
If
you don’t shift down, your brakes could get
so
hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then
have poor braking
or
even none going down a
hill.
You
could crash. Shift down to let your engine
assist your brakes on
a
steep downhill slope.
I
li
’
A
CAUTION:
II
r
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL
(N)
or
with the
ignition
off
is
dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work
of
slowing down. They could
get
so
hot that they wouldn’t work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none going
down a hill. You could crash. Always have your
engine running and your vehicle in gear when
you go downhill.
e
e
e
Know how to go
uphill.
You may want to
shift
down
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine
and transmission, and you can climb the hill better.
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
As
you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled
car
or an accident.
4-23
You may see highway signs
on
mountains that warn of
special problems. Examples
are
long grades, passing or
no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or winding
roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action.
Winter
Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
0
Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
Include an
ice
scraper,
a
small brush or broom, a supply
of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer
clothing, a small shovel,
a
flashlight, a red cloth and a
couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you will
be driving under severe conditions, include a small bag
of
sand, a piece of old carpet
or
a couple of burlap bags
to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure
these items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most
of
the time, those places where your tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll
have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be
very careful.
What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive
on.
But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the
least traction
of
all. You can get wet
ice
when it’s about
freezing
(32°F;
OOC) and freezing rain begins
to
fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until
salt
and sand crews
can get there.
Whatever the condition
--
smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow
--
drive with caution.
Keep your traction control system on. It improves your
ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery road.
Even though your vehicle has the TCS system, you’ll
want to slow down and adjust your driving
to
the road
conditions. See “Traction Control System” in the Index.
4-25
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even
though you have the anti-lock braking system, you’ll
want to begin stopping sooner than you would on
dry
pavement. See “Anti-Lock” in the Index.
Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit
a
spot
that’s covered with ice. On
an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around
clumps
of
trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface
of
a curve or an overpass may
remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear.
If
you see a patch of ice ahead
of
you, brake before you
are on it. Try not to brake while you’re actually on
the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
If
You’re Caught in a Blizzard
If you
are
stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help
and you can hike through the snow. Here
are
some
things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your
passengers safe:
Turn on your hazard flashers.
Tie
a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you’ve been stopped by the snow.
Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body
insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
mats
--
anything you can wrap around yourself or
tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
4-27
I
A
CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and
kill
you. You can’t see it or smell it,
so
you might not
know
it
is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check
around again from time to time to be sure snow
doesn’t collect there.
Open
a
window just a little on the side
of
the
vehicle that’s away from the wind. This will help
keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must.
This
saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it
go
a little faster
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly.
This
uses less
fuel
for the heat that you get and it keeps the
battery charged.
You
will need a well-charged battery to
restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on
with your headlamps. Let the heater
run
for a while.
Then, shut the engine
off
and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again
and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable
from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the
fuel
as
long as you can.
To
help keep warm, you can get
out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or
so
until help comes.
Loading
Your
Vehicle
TIRE-LOADING INFORMATION
VEHICLE CAP. WT.
FRT.
CTR.
RR.
TOTAL LBS.
MAX.
LOADING
&
GVWR
SAME AS VEHICLE
CAPACITY WEIGHT
XXX
COLD TIRE
TIRE
SIZE
SPEED
PRESSURE
RTG PSI/KPa
FRT.
RR.
SPA.
IF
TIRES ARE
HOT,
ADD 4PSIi28KPa
SEE
OWNER‘S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL
INFORMATiON
Two
labels on your vehicle show how much weight it
may properly carry. The Tire-Loading Information label
found on the rear edge of the driver’s door tells you the
proper size, speed rating and recommended inflation. It
also gives you important information about the number
of people that can be in your vehicle and the total weight
that you can carry. This weight is called Vehicle
Capacity Weight and includes the weight
of
all
occupants, cargo, and all non-factory-installed options.
MFD
BY
GENERAL MOTORS CORP
DATE GVWR GAWR FRT GAWR
RR
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS
TO
ALL APPLI-
CABLE
U.S.
FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE
SAFETY,
BUMPER,
AND THEFT PREVENTION
STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE
OF
MANUFACTURE
SHOWN
ABOVE.
I
The other label is the Certification label, found on the
rear edge of the driver’s door. It tells you the gross
weight capacity of your vehicle, called the GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR includes the
weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) for either the front
or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load,
you
should spread it
out. Don’t carry more than
100
lbs.
(45
kg)
in your
rear area.
4-29
Do
not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR,
or either the maximum front or
rear
GAWR.
If
you do, parts on your vehicle
can
break,
or it can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control.
Also,
overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.
NOTICE:
Your warranty does not cover parts or
components that fail because of overloading.
If
you put things inside your vehicle
--
like suitcases,
tools, packages
or
anything else
--
they will go as fast as
the vehicle goes.
If
you have to stop or turn quickly, or
if
there
is
a crash, they’ll keep going.
rn
I
A
CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in
a
crash.
0
Put things in the rear area
of
your vehicle.
Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
lky
to spread the weight evenly.
inside the vehicle
so
that some of them are
above the tops of the seats.
Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in
your vehicle.
0
When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure
it
whenever you can.
Towing
A
Trailer
Your Corvette is neither designed nor intended to tow
a trailer.
Section
5 Problems
on
the
Road
Here
you’ll
find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road.
5-2
5-3
5-8
5-13
Hazard Warning Flashers
Jump
Starting
Towing
Your Vehicle
Engine Overheating
5-16
Cooling System
5-22
If
a Tire Goes Flat
5-22
If
You’re Stuck:
In
Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow
5-1
Hazard Warning Flashers
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front and
rear
turn
signal lamps will flash on and
off.
Press this button to make
your front and rear turn
signal lamps flash on
and
off.
The hazard warning flashers will work once the button
is pressed, regardless of the key position.
To turn off the flashers, push the hazard button.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals won't work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at
the side of the road about
300
feet
(100
m) behind
your vehicle.
Jump
Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start
your Corvette. But please use the following steps to
do it safely.
I
NOTICE:
Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that wouldn’t be
covered by your warranty.
Trying to start your Corvette by pushing or
pulling it could damage your vehicle, even
if
you
have a manual transmission. And if you have an
automatic transmission, it won’t start that
way.
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
They contain acid that can burn you.
0
They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
0
They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If
you don’t follow these steps exactly, some or all
of
these things can hurt you.
1.
Check the other vehicle. It must have
a
12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
I
NOTICE:
If
the other system isn’t a 12-volt system with a
negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged.
5-3
2.
3.
Get the vehicles close enough
so
the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching
each other.
If
they are, it could cause a ground
connection you don’t want.
You
wouldn’t be able to
start your Corvette, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
Turn
off
the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or accessory plug. Turn
off
all
lamps that
aren’t needed as well as radios. This will avoid
sparks and help save both batteries. In addition, it
could save your radio!
I
NOTICE:
If
you leave your radio on, it could be badly
damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
4.
Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive
(+)
and negative
(-)
terminals on, each.
An electric fan can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
5-4
I
Using
a
match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight
if
you need more light.
Be
sure the battery has enough water. You don’t
need to add water to the Delco Freedom@ battery
installed in every new
GM
vehicle. But
if
a
battery has filler caps, be sure the right amount
of fluid is there.
If
it is low, add water to take
care of that first.
If
you don’t, explosive gas could
be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Don’t get it on you.
If
you accidentally get
it
in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
5.
Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock.
The vehicles could be damaged,
too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some basic
things you should know. Positive
(+)
will go to
positive
(+)
and negative
(-)
will
go
to
an
unpainted
metal engine part or a body metal surface. Don’t
connect positive
(+)
to negative
(-)
or you will get a
short
that would damage the battery and maybe other
parts, too. And don’t connect negative
(-)
to
negative
(-)
on the dead battery, as this can cause
sparks. Follow Step
9
carefully.
r
I
a
CAUTION:
I
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine
is
running.
5-5
6.
Positive
(+)
goes to positive
(+)
and negative
(-)
goes to a metal engine part. Connect the red
positive
(+)
cable to the positive
(+)
terminal
of
the vehicle with the dead battery. Use a remote
positive
(+)
terminal if the vehicle has one.
7.
Don’t let the other end
touch metal. Connect it
to the positive
(+)
terminal
of
the good
battery. Use a remote
positive
(+)
terminal if
the vehicle has one.
8.
Now connect the
black negative
(-)
cable
to the good battery’s
negative
(-)
terminal.
Don’t let the other end
touch anything until the
next step.
9.
The other end of the negative
(-)
cable doesn’t go
to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy, unpainted
metal part on the engine
of
the vehicle with the
dead battery. Attach the cable at least
18
inches
(46
cm) away from the dead battery, but not near
engine parts that move. The electrical connection is
just as good there, but the chance of sparks getting
back to the battery is much less.
10.
Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11.
‘Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery.
If
it
won’t start after a few tries, it probably needs service.
12.
Remove the cables
in
reverse order to prevent
electrical shorting. Take care that they don’t touch
each other or any other metal.
A. Heavy Metal Engine Part
B.
Good Battery
C.
Dead Battery
5-7
Towing
Your
Vehicle
Try to have a
GM
dealer or a professional towing service
tow your vehicle. They can provide the right equipment
and know-how to tow your vehicle without damage.
If
your
vehicle has been changed or modified since it
was factory new by adding aftermarket items like
fog
lamps, aero skirting, or special tires and wheels, these
instructions and illustrations may not be correct.
Before you
do
anything, turn on the hazard
warning flashers.
When you call, tell the towing service:
That your vehicle cannot be towed with
sling-type equipment.
0
That your vehicle
has
rear-wheel drive.
The make, model and year of
your
vehicle.
0
Whether
you
can still move the shift lever.
If there was an accident, what was damaged.
0
If the vehicle is to be towed from the rear with a
wheel-lift truck, a front dolly will be required.
When the towing service arrives; let the tow operator
know
that this manual contains detailed towing
instructions and illustrations. The operator may want
to
see them.
To
help avoid injury to you or others:
Never let passengers ride in a vehicle that
is
Never tow faster than safe or posted speeds.
Never tow with damaged parts not
0
Never get under your vehicle after it has
Always secure the vehicle on each side with
0
Use only R-hooks.
being towed.
fully secured.
been lifted by the tow truck.
separate safety chains when towing it.
A
vehicle can fall from a car carrier if
it
isn’t
adequately secured. This can cause a collision,
serious personal injury and vehicle damage. The
vehicle should be tightly secured with chains or
steel cables before
it
is transported.
Don’t use substitutes (ropes, leather straps,
canvas webbing, etc.) that can be cut by sharp
edges underneath the towed vehicle. Always use
R-hooks inserted in the front and rear R-hook
slots. Never use J-hooks. They will damage
drivetrain and suspension components.
When your vehicle is being towed, have the ignition
key in the
OFF
position. The steering wheel should
be clamped in a straight-ahead position, with a
clamping device designed for towing service.
Do
not
use
the vehicle’s steering column lock for this. The
transmission should be in
NEUTRAL
(N)
and the
parking brake released.
5-9
Front
Towing
Tow
Limits
--
35
mph
(55
kh),
50
miles
(80
km)
I
NOTICE:
Do not tow with sling-type equipment or bumper,
fog lamps and air dam damage will occur. Use
wheel-lift or car-carrier equipment. Additional
ramping may be required for car-carrier
equipment. Use safety chains and wheel straps.
Use the shipping slots for car-carrier securing.
Don’t have your vehicle towed on the rear wheels
unless you have to.
If
the vehicle must be towed
on the rear wheels, don’t exceed the tow limits or
your transmission will be damaged.
NOTICE: (Continued)
NOTICE: (Continued)
Towing
a
vehicle over rough surfaces could
damage the vehicle. Damage can occur from
vehicle to ground or vehicle to wheel-lift
equipment.
To
help avoid damage, install a
towing dolly and raise the vehicle until adequate
clearance is obtained between the ground and/or
wheel-lift equipment.
Do not attach winch cables or
J-hooks
to
suspension components when using car-carrier
equipment. Always use R-hooks inserted in the
shipping slots.
I
NOTICE:
When using wheel-lift equipment, front tire to
ground clearance distance must be a minimum of
17
inches
(43
cm) and a maximum of
22
inches
(56
cm) or damage will occur.
Rear
Towing
NOTICE:
Do
not tow with sling-type equipment or the rear
bumper will be damaged. Use wheel-lift or
car-carrier equipment. Additional ramping may
be required for car-carrier equipment. Use safety
chains and wheel straps. Use the shipping slots
for car-carrier securing. When using wheel-lift
equipment, a towing dolly must be used under
the front wheels or vehicle damage will occur.
When using wheel-lift equipment, rear tire to
ground clearance distance must be
a
minimum of
13
inches
(33
cm) and
a
maximum of
18
inches
(46
cm) or damage will occur.
NOTICE: (Continued)
5-11
NOTICE: (Continued)
Towing a vehicle over rough surfaces could
damage the vehicle. Damage can occur from
vehicle to ground or vehicle to wheel-lift
equipment. Install a towing dolly and raise the
vehicle until adequate clearance
is
obtained
between the ground and/or wheel-lift equipment.
Do
not attach winch cables
or
J-hooks
to
suspension components when using car-carrier
equipment. Always use R-hooks inserted into the
shipping slots.
Do not allow chains to contact springs as damage
to springs could result.
SHIPPING
SLOT
"
5-12
~
Engine Overheating
You will find an engine coolant temperature gage on the
instrument cluster and a COOLANT OVER TEMP
message on the Driver Information Center
(DIC).
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
Should
a
low coolant condition exist and the messages
COOLANT OVERTEMP and REDUCED ENGINE
POWER
are displayed, along with the Check Engine
light, an overheat protection mode which alternates
firing groups of four cylinders helps prevent engine
damage. In this mode, you will notice a loss in power
and engine performance. This operating mode allows
your vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an
emergency; you may drive up
to
50
miles
(80
km).
1
NOTICE:
After driving in the overheated engine protection
operating mode, to avoid engine damage, allow
the engine to cool before attempting any repair.
The engine oil will be severely degraded. Repair
the cause of coolant loss, change the oil and reset
the oil life monitor. See “Engine Oil, When to
Change” in the Index.
5-13
If
Steam
Is
Coming From Your Engine
y4
‘I
CAUTION:
I
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even
if
you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine
if
you see or hear steam coming
from it. Just turn
it
off
and get everyone away
from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until
there
is
no sign of steam or coolant before you
open the hood.
If
you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in
it
can catch fire. You or
others could be badly burned. Stop your engine if
it
overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
engine
is
cool.
5-14
-.
.
. .
NOTICE:
If
your engine catches fire because you keep
driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be
badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. See “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode” in the Index.
If
No
Steam
Is
Coming
From
Your
Engine
If
you get the overheat warning but see or hear no
steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes
the engine can get a little too hot when you:
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
0
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
If
you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute
or
so:
1.
Turn off
your
air conditioner.
2.
3.
Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the window
as
necessary.
If you’re in a traffic
jam,
shift to
NEUTRAL
(N);
otherwise, shift to the highest gear while
driving
--
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE
(@)
or
THIRD
(3)
for automatic transmissions.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about
10
minutes.
If
the warning doesn’t come back on, you can
drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
If there’s still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine
for two or three minutes while you’re parked, to
see
if
the warning stops. But then, if you still have the
warning,
turn
off
the engine
and
get everyone
out
of
the
vehicle
until it cools down. Also, see “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode” listed previously in
this section.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
5-15
Cooling
System
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what
you’ll
see:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine
is
not running and
can injure
you.
Keep hands, clothing and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
I
I
If
the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,
don’t do anything else until it cools down.
A.
Electric Engine Fans
B.
Coolant Surge Tank
5-16
The coolant level should be at or above the
FULL
COLD
mark.
If
it isn’t, you may have a leak in the radiator hoses,
heater hoses, radiator, water
pump
or somewhere else in
the cooling system.
A
CAUTION:
I
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them.
If
you
do, you can be burned.
Don’t run the engine
if
there is a leak.
If
you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine
fire,
and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
NOTICE:
Engine damage
if
you keep running your engine
without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty.
See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode” in the Index.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check to
see if the electric engine cooling
fans
are running.
If
the
engine is overheating, both
fans
should be running. If
they aren’t.
vow
vehicle needs service.
5-17
How
to
Add
Coolant
to
the
Coolant
Surge
Tank
If
you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level
isn’t at the FULL COLD
mark,
add a
50/50
mixture of
clean water
(preferably distilled) and DEX-COOL@
coolant at the coolant surge tank, but be sure the cooling
system, including the coolant surge tank pressure cap, is
cool before you do it. (See “Engine Coolant”
in
the
Index for more information.)
A
CAUTION:
I
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and
if‘
you turn the coolant surge
tank
pressure cap
--
even a little
--
they can come
out at
high
speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the coolant surge
tank
pressure cap,
is
hot. Wait
for
the cooling system
and coolant surge
tank
pressure cap to cool
if
you
ever have to
turn
the pressure cap.
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant
warning system is set for the proper coolant
mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture,
your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t
get the overheat warning. Your engine could
catch fire and you or others could be burned.
Use
a
50/50
mixture of clean water and
DEX-COOL@
coolant.
NOTICE:
In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the
engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
So
use the recommended coolant.
You can be burned
if
you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn
if
the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
5-19
1.
You
can remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap
when the cooling system, including the coolant surge
tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no
longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly about
one-quarter turn to the left and then stop.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop.
A
hiss means
there is still some pressure left.
2.
Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
3.
Then fill the coolant surge tank with the proper
mixture, up to the
FULL
COLD
mark.
4.
With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start the
engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine
cooling fans.
By
this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches the
FULL
COLD
mark.
5.
Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the pressure
cap is tight.
5-21
If
a
Tire Goes Flat
Your Corvette has neither a spare tire nor tire changing
equipment, because it was built with Goodyear
Extended Mobility Tires (EMT). See “Extended
Mobility Tires” in the Index.
A
C.*
UTION:
If
You’re Stuck: In Sand,
Mud,
Ice
or
Snow
What you don’t want to
do
when your vehicle is stuck is
to
spin
your wheels too fast. The method known as
“rocking” can help you get out when you’re stuck, but
you must use caution.
Because your vehicle has no spare tire, no tire
changing equipment, and no provisions to store a
tire
in
the vehicle, special tools and procedures
are required if a tire needs to be serviced.
If
these
tools and procedures aren’t used, you or others
could be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged. Always be sure the proper tools and
procedures,
as
described in the
GM
Corvette
Service Manual, are used.
To
order a service manual, see “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.
A
CAUTION:
If
you
let your tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured.
And, the transmission or other parts of the
vehicle can overheat. That could cause an engine
compartment fire or other damage. When you’re
stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible. Don’t
spin the wheels above
35
mph
(55
km/h)
as shown
on the speedometer.
I
NOTICE:
Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your
vehicle as well as the tires.
If
you spin the wheels
too fast while shifting your transmission back
and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see “Tire Chains’’ in the Index.
Rocking
Your
Vehicle
To
Get
It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels. You should turn
your TCS System
off.
(See “Traction Control System’’
in the Index.) Then shift back and forth between
REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels
as little as possible. For a manual transmission, shift
slowly between either FIRST
(1)
or SECOND
(2)
and
REVERSE (R), allowing the wheels to stop before
shifting into gear. Release the accelerator pedal while
you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transmission is in gear. If that doesn’t get you
out after a few tries, you may need to be towed out.
If
you do need to be towed out, see “Towing Your Vehicle”
in the Index.
5-23
fi
NOTES
Section
6
Service and Appearance Care
Here you will find information about the care
of
your vehicle. This section begins with service and fuel information,
and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels. There is also technical information about your
vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care.
6-2
6-3
6-8
6- 12
6- 16
6-18
6- 19
6-20
6-2
1
6-22
6-26
6-26
6-27
6-29
6-32
6-33
6-37
6-40
Service
Fuel
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Engine Oil
Air Cleaner
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Manual Transmission Fluid
Hydraulic Clutch
Rear Axle
Engine Coolant
Surge Tank Pressure Cap
Power Steering Fluid
Windshield Washer Fluid
Brakes
Battery
Bulb Replacement
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
Tires
6-52
6-52
6-54
6-54
6-55
6-55
6-56
6-57
6-58
6-58
6-59
6-59
6-61
6-62
6-62
6-62
6-69
6-70
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Care of Safety Belts
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Weatherstrips
Cleaning a Removable Roof Panel
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
Cleaning Your Convertible Top
Cleaning Aluminum Wheels
Cleaning Tires
Finish Damage
Underbody Maintenance
Appearance Care Materials Chart
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts Identification Label
Electrical System
Replacement Bulbs
Capacities and Specifications
6-1
Service
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealer for
all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts and
GM-trained and supported service people.
We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
n
benuine
Doing
Your
Own
Service Work
If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll
want to use the proper Corvette Service Manual.
It
tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle than
this manual can. To order the proper service manual, see
“Service and Owner Publications” in the Index.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see “Servicing Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle’’ in the Index.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See “Maintenance Record” in the Index.
I
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to
do
service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
-
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
Be
sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can be easily confused. If you use
the wrong fasteners, parts can later break
or fall off. You
could
be hurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of
Your
Vehicle
Things you rnight add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise
and affect windshield washer performance. Check with
your dealer before adding equipment to the outside
of
your vehicle.
Fuel
Use premium unleaded gasoline rated at
91
octane or
higher for best performance. You may use middle grade
or regular unleaded gasolines, but your vehicle may not
accelerate as well.
At a minimum, the gasoline you use should meet
specifications ASTM
D48
14
in the United States and
CGSB
3.5-M93
in
Canada. Improved gasoline
specifications have been developed by the American
Automobile Manufacturers Association (AAMA) for
better vehicle performance and engine protection.
Gasolines meeting the AAMA specification could
provide improved driveability and emission control
system protection compared to other gasolines.
Be sure the posted octane for premium is at least
91
(at
least
89
for middle grade and
87
for regular). If the
octane is less than
87,
you may get a heavy knocking
noise when you drive. If it’s bad enough, it can damage
your engine.
If you’re using fuel rated at the recommended octane or
higher and you hear heavy knocking, your engine needs
service. But don’t worry if you hear a little pinging
noise when you’re accelerating or driving up a hill.
That’s normal, and you don’t have to buy a higher
octane fuel to get rid of pinging. It’s the heavy, constant
knock that means you have a problem.
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (indicated on the underhood emission control
label), it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications.
If
such fuels are not available
in states adopting California emissions standards, your
f
6-3
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel may turn on and/or your
vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If
this
occurs, return
to your authorized Corvette dealer for diagnosis to
determine the cause of failure. In the event it is
determined that the cause of the condition is the type of
fuels used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT);
ask your service station operator whether or not
his
fuel
contains MMT. General Motors does not recommend the
use of such gasolines.
If
fuels containing MMT are used,
spark plug life may be reduced and your emission
control system performance may be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel
may turn on. If
this
occurs, return to your authorized
Corvette dealer for service.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent deposits from forming
in
your engine and fuel
system, allowing your emission control system to
function properly. Therefore, you should not have to add
anything to the fuel. In addition, gasolines containing
oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and
reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to
help clean the air. General Motors recommends that you
use these gasolines if they comply with the
specifications described earlier.
NOTICE:
Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Don’t use it. It can corrode
metal parts in your fuel system and also damage
plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t
be covered under your warranty.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard to
find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
To check on fuel availability, ask
an
auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you’ll be driving.
You
can also write us at the following address for
advice. Just tell
us
where you’re going and give your
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
General Motors Overseas Distribution Corporation
1908
Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario
L1H
8P7
Filling
Your
Tank
The fuel filler door is on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
The fuel cap is attached by
a
tether for your convenience.
rn
A
CAUTION:
I
Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. It burns
violently, and that can cause very bad injuries.
Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away from gasoline.
The fuel filler door release
is the black button at the
front of the center console
storage compartment.
I
6-5
If your fuel filler door release won’t operate, there is a
manual release tab. The tab is located against the upper
trim on the driver’s side in the rear compartment.
While refueling, place the cap in the holder on the fuel
filler door to prevent damage to your vehicle’s finish.
To remove the cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise). The cap has a spring in it; if you let
go of the cap too soon, it will spring back to the right.
6-6
When you put the cap back on, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make sure
you fully install the cap.
/9
CAUTION:
If
J
,.I
get gasoline on yourself and then
something ignites it, you could be badly burned.
Gasoline can spray out on you
if
you open the
fuel filler cap too quickly. This spray can happen
if your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in
hot weather. Open the fuel filler cap slowly and
wait for any “hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew
the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See “Cleaning the
Outside of Your Vehicle” in the Index.
I
NOTICE:
If
you need a new cap, be sure to get the right
type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If
you get
the wrong type, it may not fit or have proper
venting, and your fuel tank and emissions system
might be damaged.
6-7
Filling
a
Portable Fuel Container
‘
A
Cr
N:
Never fill
a
portable fuel container while
it
is
in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the gasoline vapor. You can
be badly burned and your vehicle damaged
if
this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
0
Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
Do
not fill a container while
it
is
inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline.
Checking Things Under the Hood
An electric fan under the hood can start up and
injure you even when the engine
is
not running.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
start a fire. These include liquids like gasoline,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others
could be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill
things that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood
Release
NOTICE:
In order to avoid possible contact
of
the hood to
the headlamp doors, care should be taken in
raising the hood with the headlamps up,
or
shut
off
the lamps prior to opening the hood.
To
open the hood, first pull
the handle inside the vehicle.
Then
go
to the side
of
the vehicle and pull up on the rear
edge
of
the hood, near the windshield.
6-9
You'll see the following when
you
open the
hood:
D!
E
6-10
-~
A. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap
B.
Battery
C.
Engine Oil Dipstick
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap
E.
Air Cleaner
E
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
G.
Brake Fluid Reservoir
H. Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Reservoir (If Equipped)
I.
Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps
are on properly. Then, just pull the hood down and
close it firmly.
!
:
,::
'3
:
6-11
Engine
Oil
If the LOW OIL
LEVEL
message on the Driver
Information Center comes on, it means you need to
check your engine oil level right away. For more
information, see “Driver Information Center” in the
Index. You should check your engine oil level regularly;
this is an added reminder.
It’s
a
good idea to check your engine oil level every time
you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick is
next to the coolant surge
tank. The dipstick handle is
a round, yellow loop.
Turn off the engine and give the oil a few minutes to
drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil dipstick
might not show the actual level.
Checking Engine Oil
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or a
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down.
When
to
Add
Engine Oil
If
the oil is at or below the ADD mark, you’ll need to
add at least one quart of oil. But you must use the right
kind. This part explains what kind of oil to use. For
crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and Specifications”
in the Index.
6-12
I
NOTICE:
Don’t add too much oil.
If
your engine has
so
much oil that the oil level gets above the upper
mark that shows the proper operating range,
your engine could be damaged.
The engine oil fill cap is
on
top of the right valve rocker
arm cover.
Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when you’re through.
What
Kind
of
Engine
Oil
to
Use
Look for two things:
GM4718M
The
Corvette engine requires a special oil meeting
GM
Standard
GM4718M.
Oils meeting this Standard
may be identified as synthetic. However, not all
synthetic
oils will meet this
GM
Standard. You
should look for and use only an oil that meets
GM
Standard
GM47 18M.
FNOTICE:
If
you use oils that don’t have the
GM4718M
Standard designation, you can cause engine
damage not covered by your warranty.
6-13
RECOMMENDED SAL VlSCOSlTT GRADE ENGINE
OILS
FOR
BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING, SELECT THE LOWEST
SAE VISCOSITY GRADE OIL
FOR
THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE.
HOT
WEATHER
’TC)
~fi
+
20
0
SAE
SW-30
PREFERRED
COLD
WEATHER
FOR
THIS
WOK
SYMBOL
,I
SAE
I
1OW-30
DO
NOT USE SAE
2OW-50
OR
ANY OTHER
GRADE
OIL
NOT RECOMMENDED
0
SAE
5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE
5W-30
is best
for your vehicle. However, you can use
SAE
1OW-30
if
it’s going to be
0°F
(-18°C)
or above.’
These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity,
or thickness.
Do
not use other viscosity
oils
such as
SAE
2OW-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the “Starburst” symbol
on the container.
This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by
the American Petroleum Institute (API).
Do
not use any
oil which does not
carry
this Starburst symbol.
6-14
You should look for this on the oil container, and use
only
those oils that are identified as meeting GM
Standard 4718M and have the Starburst symbol on the
front of the oil container.
Your Corvette engine is filled at the factory with a
Mobil
l@
synthetic oil, which meets all requirements
for your vehicle.
Substitute Engine
Oil:
When adding oil to maintain
engine oil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M
may not be available. You can add substitute oil
designated SAE 5W-30 with the “Starburst” symbol at
all temperatures. If temperatures are above
0
OF
(-
18
O
C),
you may substitute
SAE
low-30 with the “Starburst”
symbol. Substitute oil not meeting GM Standard
GM4718M should not be used for an oil change.
Engine Oil Additives
Don’t add anything to your oil. Your dealer is ready to
advise if you think something should be added.
When to Change Engine Oil
Your Corvette has an Engine Oil Life Monitor. This
feature will let you know when to change your oil and
filter
--
usually between
3,000
miles
(5
000
km)
and
10,000 miles (16
000
km) since your last oil change.
Under severe conditions, the indicator may come on
before
3,000
miles
(5
000
km).
Never drive your vehicle
more than 10,000 miles (16
000
km) or 12 months
(whichever occurs first) without an oil change. Use
engine oil meeting the GM Standard GM47 18M.
The system won’t detect dust in the
oil.
So,
if you drive
in a dusty area, be sure to change your oil every
3,000 miles
(5
000
lun)
or sooner if the CHANGE OIL
light comes on. Remember to reset the Engine Oil Life
Monitor when the oil has been changed. For more
.information, see “Engine Oil Life Monitor” in the Index.
When Changing the Engine Oil
There is a special procedure for changing engine oil,
contact your dealer for additional information or the
procedure can be found in a Corvette Service Manual.
To purchase a service manual, see “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.
How
to Reset the Engine Oil Life Monitor
Press RESET to acknowledge the CHANGE OIL
SOON
warning. The oil page will then show a message such as
OIL LIFE
0%.
To reset the monitor, press and hold
RESET for two seconds. You will then receive a
message such as OIL LIFE 99%.
6-15
What
to
Do
with
Used
Oil
Did you know that used engine oil contains certain
elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could
even cause cancer? Don’t let used oil stay on your skin
for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and
water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or throw away
clothing or rags containing used engine oil. (See the
manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal of
oil products.)
Used oil can be a real threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all free-flowing oil
from the filter before disposal. Don’t ever dispose of oil
by putting it in the trash, pouring
it
on the ground, into
sewers, or into streams or bodies
of
water. Instead,
recycle it by taking it
to
a place that collects used oil.
If
you have a problem properly disposing
of
your used oil,
ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling
center for help.
Air
Cleaner
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to
replace the
air
filter.
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
c
Operating the engine with the
air
cleaner
off
can
cause
you
or others
to
be burned. The
air
cleaner
not only cleans the air, it stops flame if the engine
backfires. If it isn’t there, and the engine
backfires, you could be burned. Don’t drive with
it off, and be careful working on the engine with
the air cleaner
off.
NOTICE:
If
the air cleaner is
off,
a
backfire can cause
a
damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get
into your engine, which will damage it. Always
have the air cleaner in place when you’re driving.
Air Filter Replacement
To
remove the air filter:
1.
Pull
up
on
the
clips
on
each side to release
the assembly.
6-17
2.
Pull the assembly out.
3.
Replace the filter.
4.
Push the assembly back into place.
5.
Fasten the clips.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
How
to
Check
Because this operation is difficult, you may choose to
have this done at your dealer service department. It is
not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.
A
transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss.
If
a leak occurs, take the vehicle to your dealer service
department and have it repaired as soon as possible.
There is a special procedure for checking and changing
the transmission fluid. Contact your dealer for additional
information or the procedure can be found in a Corvette
Service Manual. To purchase a service manual, see
“Service and Owner Publications’’ in the Index.
I
NOTICE:
I
We recommend that only fluid labeled
DEXRON@-111 be used, because fluid with that
label
is
made specially for your automatic
transmission. Damage caused by fluid other than
DEXRON@-111
is
not covered by your new
vehicle warranty.
Change both the fluid and filter every
50,000
miles
(80
000
km)
if the vehicle is mainly driven under one of
these conditions:
In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches
90
OF
(32
O
C)
or higher.
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
High performance operation.
If you do not use your vehicle under one of
these conditions. Change the fluid and filter every
100,000
miles
(166
000
km).
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index for
the proper service intervals for the transmission fluid
and filter.
Manual Transmission Fluid
When
to
Check
How
to
Check
Because this operation can be difficult, you may
choose to have this done at your Chevrolet dealership
Service Department.
If
you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the
instructions here, or you could get a false reading.
NOTICE:
Too
much or too little fluid can damage your
transmission. Too much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and fall on hot
exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Be sure
to
get an accurate reading if you check your
transmission fluid.
A
good time to have it checked is when the engine oil
is changed. However, the fluid in your manual
transmission doesn’t require changing.
Check the fluid level only when your engine is
off,
the
vehicle
is
parked on a level place and the transmission
is
cool enough for you to rest your fingers on the
transmission case.
6-19
Then, follow these steps:
4
1.
Remove the filler plug.
2.
Check that the lubricant level is
up
to the bottom of
the filler plug hole.
3.
If the fluid level is good, install the plug and be sure
it is fully seated. If the fluid level is low, add more
fluid as described in the next steps.
How
to
Add
Fluid
Here’s how to add fluid. Refer to the Maintenance
Schedule to determine what kind of fluid to use. See
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
1.
Remove the filler plug.
2.
Add fluid at the filler plug hole. Add only enough
fluid to bring the fluid level up to the bottom of the
filler plug hole.
3.
Install the filler plug. Be sure the plug is fully seated.
4.
Tighten the plug
to
20 1b.-ft.
(27
N-m).
Hydraulic
Clutch
The clutch linkage in your vehicle is self-adjusting. The
clutch master cylinder reservoir is filled with hydraulic
clutch fluid.
It is not necessary to regularly check clutch fluid unless
you suspect there is a leak in the system. Adding fluid
won’t correct a leak.
A
fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.
Have the system inspected and repaired.
When
to
Check and What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often you should check the fluid level in your clutch
master cylinder reservoir and for the proper fluid. See
“Owner Checks and Services” and “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
How
To
Check and Add Fluid
The clutch master cylinder is on the driver’s side of the
engine compartment, near the fender.
To
check the fluid, remove the cap and rubber seal.
Fluid should be added
if
the fluid level is below the step
on the inside of the reservoir. There are additional
instructions on the reservoir cap.
Replace the rubber seal and cap.
Rear
Axle
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often
to
check the lubricant. See “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections” in the Index.
6-21
How
to Check Lubricant
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise
the
level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
To add lubricant when the level is low, use Axle
Lubricant (GM Part
No.
12345977)
or
SAE
8OW-90
GL-5 gear lubricant. To completely refill after draining,
add
4
ounces
(1 18
ml)
of Limited-Slip Differential
Lubricant Additive (GM Part
No.
1052358).
Then fill to
the bottom of the filler plug hole with Axle Lubricant
(GM
Part No.
12345977)
or SAE
8OW-90
GL-5
gear lubricant.
Engine
Coolant
The cooling
s
stem in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for
5
years or
150,000
miles
(240
000
km)
whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL’ extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how
to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see “Engine Overheating” in
the Index.
A
50/50
mixture of water and DEX-COOL@
coolant will:
0
Give freezing protection down to
-34°F (-37°C).
8
0
Give boiling protection up to
265
“F
(129”
C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
0
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gauges work as
they should.
6-22
NOTICE:
When adding coolant, it is important that you use
only
DEX-COOL@
(silicate-free) coolant.
If
coolant other than DEX-COOL is added to the
system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the
engine coolant will require change sooner
--
at
30,000
miles
(50 000
km)
or
24
months,
whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the use
of coolant other than DEX-COOL@ is not
covered by your new vehicle warranty.
What
to
Use
Use a mixture of one-half
clean water
(preferably
distilled) and one-half
DEX-COOL@
coolant which
won’t damage aluminum parts.
If
you use this mixture,
you don’t need
to
add anything else.
I
/II
CALTTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant
warning system
is
set for the proper coolant
mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture,
your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t
get the overheat warning. Your engine could
catch fire and you or others could be burned.
Use a
50/50
mixture
of
clean water and
DEX-COOL@
coolant.
6-23
NOTICE:
If
you use an improper coolant mixture, your
engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can
freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core
and other parts.
If you have
to
add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
NOTICE:
If
you use the proper coolant, you don’t have to
add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to
improve the system. These can be harmful.
Checking
Coolant
The coolant surge tank
is
in the engine compartment
behind the headlamp.
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and
i
scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly.
Never turn the surge tank pressure cap
--
even a
little
--
when the engine and radiator are hot.
I
When your engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
the FULL COLD mark. Don’t overfill the surge tank.
Too
much coolant can result in an ovefflow when the
fluid is hot.
If
the LOW COOLANT message comes
on,
it means
you’re low
on
engine coolant.
Adding Coolant
If
you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL@
coolant mixture at
the
surge
tank,
but only when the
engine is cool.
A
CAUTION:
r
You can be burned
if
you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and
it
will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is tight.
6-25
Surge Tank Pressure Cap
NOTICE:
The surge tank pressure cap is a
15
psi
(105
kPa)
pressure-type cap and must be tightly installed to
prevent coolant
loss
and possible engine damage
from overheating.
When you replace the surge tank pressure cap, a GM cap
is recommended.
Thermostat
Engine coolant temperature is controlled by a thermostat
in the engine coolant system. The thermostat stops the
flow
of
coolant through the radiator until the coolant
reaches a pre-set temperature.
When you replace the thermostat, a GM thermostat
is recommended.
Power Steering Fluid
When to Check Power Steering
Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak
in
the system
or
you hear
an
unusual noise.
A
fluid loss
in
this system could indicate
a problem. Have the system inspected
and
repaired.
How
To
Check Power Steering
Fluid
When the engine compartment is cool, wipe the cap and
the top of the reservoir clean, then unscrew the cap and
wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. Replace the cap and
completely tighten it. Then remove the cap again and
look at the fluid level on the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. If
necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up
to the mark.
0
When the engine
compartment is hot, the
level should be at the
HOT
mark.
When the engine
compartment is cool, the
level should be at the
FULL COLD mark.
What
to
Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be
operating your vehicle in
an
area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
6-27
Adding
Washer
Fluid
Open the cap labeled WASHER
FL,UID
ONLY.
Add
washer
fluid
until
the tank
is
full.
NOTICE:
e
0
e
e
When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze
and damage your washer fluid tank and
other parts of the washer system. Also,
water doesn’t clean as well as washer fluid.
Fill your washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it’s very cold. This
allows for expansion if freezing occurs,
which could damage the tank if it is
completely full.
Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
your windshield washer. It can damage
your washer system and paint.
6-28
Brakes
Brake
Fluid
Your brake master cylinder reservoir
is
here. It
is
filled
with DOT-3 brake fluid.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level
in
the
reservoir might go down. The first is that
the
brake fluid
goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake
lining
wear. When new linings are put
in,
the fluid level
goes back
up.
The other reason
is
that fluid is leaking out
of the brake system.
If
it is, you should have your brake
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later your
brakes won’t work well, or won’t work at
all.
So,
it isn’t a good idea to “top
off’
your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much
fluid when you get new brake linings.
You
should add
(or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
If
you have too much brake fluid, it
can
spill
on
the
engine. The fluid
will
burn
if
the engine is hot
enough.
You
or others could be
burned,
and your
vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid
only
when work
is
done
on
the brake hydraulic system.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to
check your brake fluid. See “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections” in the Index.
6-29
Checking Brake Fluid
You can check the brake fluid without
taking
off
the cap.
Just look at the brake fluid reservoir. The
fluid
level should
be above the
MIN
mark on the reservoir.
If
it isn’t, have
your brake system checked
to
see
if there is a leak.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system, make
sure the level is between the
MIN
and
MAX
marks.
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only
DOT-3
brake
fluid
--
such as Delco Supreme
11
@
(GM
Part
No.
12377967).
Use new brake fluid from a sealed
container only.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it.
This
will help keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
NOTICE:
Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
brake system parts. For example, just a few
drops
of
mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in your brake system can damage brake
system parts
so
badly that they’ll have to be
replaced. Don’t let someone put
in
the
wrong kind of fluid.
If
you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
on your vehicle.
If
you do, wash
it
off
immediately. See “Appearance Care” in
the Index.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a
high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are
worn
and new pads are needed. The sound may come and
go
or
be heard
all
the time
your
vehicle is moving (except when
you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly).
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
your brakes won’t work well. That could lead to
an accident. When you hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.
I
NOTICE:
Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads
could result
in
costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something
is
wrong with
your brakes.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
See “Brake System Inspection” in Section
7
of this
manual under Part
C
“Periodic Maintenance
Inspections.”
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal
travel.
This
could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake
Adjustment
As
you make brake stops, your disc brakes
automatically adjust for wear.
6-31
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a modern vehicle is complex. Its
many parts have to be of top quality and work well
together
if
the vehicle is to have really good braking.
Your vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality
GM brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system
--
for example, when your brake linings wear
down and you have to have new ones put in
--
be sure
you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you
don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly. For
example,
if
someone puts in brake linings that are wrong
for your vehicle, the balance between your front and
rear brakes can change
--
for the worse. The braking
performance you’ve come to expect can change
in
many
other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement
brake parts.
Battery
Every new Corvette has a Delco Freedom@ battery. You
never have to add water to one of these. When it’s time for
a
new battery, we recommend a Delco Freedom battery.
Get one that has the replacement number shown on the
original battery’s label. For battery replacement, see your
dealer or the Corvette Service Manual.
To
purchase a
service manual,
see
“Service and Owner
Publications”
in
the Index. After the battery
has
been
replaced, refer to the “Remote Function Actuation System”
in
the Index to resynchronize your transmitter(s).
Vehicle Storage
If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for
25
days
or more, remove the black, negative
(-)
cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode.
You
can be badly hurt
if
you
aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” in the Index
for tips
on
working around a battery without
getting hurt.
Contact your dealer to learn how
to
prepare your vehicle
for longer storage periods.
Also, for your audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent
Feature” in the Index.
6-32
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulb, see
“Replacement Bulbs” in the Index.
Halogel
Bulb
/I\
CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if
you
drop
or
scratch the bulb.
You
or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
HeadlampdHighbeam
1.
The headlamps need to be halfway open. Turn the
headlamp switch on, then quickly back to the
parking lamps setting. You may
have
to do this
a
few
times to get the half-open position.
I
2.
You can
also
open the headlamps manually by
turning the adjuster to the left.
6-33
6
3.
Remove the screws on each side of the
headlamp bezel.
4.
Open the hood.
5.
To
remove the bezel, pull the sides slightly outward
and tilt the bezel forward. Pull the clip centered
above the lens outward. Be careful not to scratch
the paint.
6.
Reach behind the lamp and turn the bulb to the left
(counterclockwise) to remove it. Don’t touch the
halogen bulbs. The inner bulb is the high beam and
the outer bulb is the low beam.
7.
Disconnect the desired bulb from the wiring harness.
8.
Reverse the steps with a new bulb.
Front nrn Signal Lamps Rear
nrn
Signal and Taillamps
1.
Remove the front fascia close out panel
attaching bolts.
2.
Remove the front fascia close out panel.
3.
Grasp the cooling duct and pull to release it from the
front fascia, then reposition
it.
This will give you
better access to the bulb.
4.
Squeeze the tab on the socket and turn it to the
left (counterclockwise) to remove the socket with
the bulb.
5.
Remove the bulb from the socket.
6.
Reverse the steps with a new bulb.
Front Sidemarker Lamps
1.
Follow Steps
1
through
3
in “Front Turn Signal
Lamps” described previously.
2.
Turn the socket one-quarter of a turn
to
the left and
pull it out.
3.
Pull the bulb straight out
of
the socket.
4.
Reverse the steps with a new bulb.
A.
Back-up Lamp
B.
Inboard Taillamp
C.
Outboard Taillamp
6-35
1.
Remove the screws.
2.
Pull the taillamp housing assembly out.
3. To
remove
the
socket with the bulb, squeeze
the tab while you turn the socket to the
left (counterclockwise).
4.
Remove the bulb from the socket.
5.
Reverse the steps with a new bulb.
Back-up
Lamps
You can access the back-up lamps through the inboard
taillamp opening. See “Rear Turn Signal and Taillamps”
in the Index.
1.
Squeeze the tab
on
the socket while turning it to the
2.
Remove the bulb from the socket.
left to remove it from the assembly.
3.
Reverse the steps with a new bulb.
For any bulb replacement procedures not listed here,
please see your dealership.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
It’s a good idea to clean or replace the wiper blade
assembly every six months. For the proper windshield
wiper blade length and type, see “Replacement Parts” in
the Index.
NOTICE:
Use care when removing
or
installing a blade
assembly. Accidental bumping can cause the arm
to fall back and strike the windshield.
To remove the wiper blade assembly:
1.
Open the hood to gain access to the
windshield wipers.
2.
Lift the wiper arm until
it
locks into
a
vertical position.
6-37
A. Blade Assembly
B.
Arm
Assembly
C.
Locking Tab
D.
Blade Pivot
E.
Hook
Slot
E
ArmHook
3.
4.
Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking tab.
Pull down on the blade assembly to release it from
the wiper
arm
hook.
Remove the insert from the blade assembly. The
insert has two notches at one end that
are
locked by
the bottom claws of the blade assembly. At the
notched end, pull the insert from the blade assembly.
A
To
install the new wiper insert:
1.
Slide the insert
(D),
notched end last, into the end
with two blade claws
(A).
Slide the insert all the way
through the blade claws at the opposite end
(B).
Plastic caps (C)
will
be forced
off
as
the insert is
fully installed.
2.
Be sure the notches
are
locked by the bottom claws.
Make sure that all other claws are properly locked on
both sides
of the insert slots.
A
B
C
A.
Claw in Notch
B. Correct Installation
C. Incorrect Installation
6-39
3.
Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper
arm
hook.
Pull up until the pivot locking tab locks
in the hook slot.
4.
Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly
into the windshield.
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a
leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, see
your Corvette Warranty booklet for details.
A
CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
0
0
0
Overloading your tires
can
cause overheating
as
a result of too much friction. You could
have an airout and a serious accident.
See
‘Zoading Your Vehicle”
in
the Index.
Underinflated tires pose the same danger as
overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact
--
such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If
your
tread is badly worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
Extended Mobility Tires
Your vehicle, when new, had Goodyear Extended
Mobility Tires (EMT). There’s no spare tire, no tire
changing equipment and no place to store a tire in the
vehicle. Extended Mobility Tires perform
so
well
without any air that a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) is
used to alert you if a tire has lost pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) has a sensor on
each road wheel that transmits to a receiver on the
instrument panel.
The system operates on a radio frequency subject to
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
with Industry and Science Canada.
This
device complies with
Part
15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2)
this
device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry and
Science Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system
by
other than an
authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
If a tire’s inflation pressure is between
5
psi (35 kPa)
and 25 psi (170 kPa), you will see a message on the
Driver Information Center. This message will show
which tire is underinflated and two chimes will sound.
An example would
be
LOW
TIRE
PRESSURE-LR.
This would mean that the inflation pressure in your left
rear tire is between 5 psi (35 Pa) and 25 psi (170 Pa).
If the inflation pressure in the tire drops below
5
psi
(35 Ea), the message would read FLAT TIRE-LR and
four chimes will sound.
See
“Driver Information
Center” in the Index.
The TPM will also alert you if a tire’s pressure is higher
than
42
psi (290 Wa). The message will show which tire
is overinflated and two chimes will sound. An example
would be HIGH PRESSURE-LR. This would mean that
the inflation pressure in your left rear tire is higher than
42 psi (290 kPa). See “Driver Information Center” in
the Index.
If a tire pressure message appears on the Driver
Information Center, stop as soon as you can. Have
the
tire pressures checked and set to those shown
on
your
Tire Loading Information label. See “Inflation
--
Tire
Pressure” in the Index.
i
,h,
CAUTION:
When the LOW TIRE PRESSURE or FLAT
TIRE message is displayed on the Driver
Information Center, your vehicle’s handling
capabilities will be reduced during severe
maneuvers.
If
you drive too fast, you could lose
control of your vehicle.
You
or others could be
injured, Don’t drive over
55
mph
(90
km/h)
when
the
LOW
TIRE PRESSURE or FLAT TIRE
message is displayed. Drive cautiously, and check
your tire pressures as soon as you can.
I
I
If a tire goes flat, you won’t need to stop on the side of
the road to change the tire. You can just keep on driving.
The shorter the distance you drive and the slower the
speed, the greater the chance that the tire will not have
to be replaced.
If
you drive on a deflated EMT for
50
miles (80
km)
or less and at speeds of 55 mph
(90
km/h)
or less, there is a good chance that the tire can
be repaired. The tire can operate effectively with no air
pressure for up to 200 miles (320
km)
at speeds up to
55
mph
(90
km/h),
but the tire would then have to be
replaced. When a tire is filled with air, it provides a
cushion between the road and the wheel. Because you
won’t have this cushion when driving on a deflated tire,
try to avoid potholes that could damage your wheel and
require replacement of it.
Some road hazards can damage a tire beyond repair.
This damage could occur even before you’ve driven on
the tire in
a
deflated condition. When a tire has been
damaged, or
if
you’ve driven any distance on a deflated
EMT, check with an authorized Goodyear EMT Service
Center to determine whether the tire can be repaired or
should be replaced. To maintain your vehicle’s extended
mobility feature, all replacement tires must be Extended
Mobility Tires. As soon as possible, contact the nearest
authorized Chevrolet or Goodyear EMT servicing
facility for inspection and repair or replacement. Call
Chevrolet at 1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-243-8872) or
Goodyear at 1-800-789-9878 24-hours a day for
information on the location of the nearest EMT
servicing facility. In Canada, contact the Customer
Communication Center at 1-800-263-3777, or Canadian
Roadside Assistance at 1-800-268-6800. You can also
use the Goodyear number listed above to locate an
authorized EMT servicing facility.
’
A
CAUTION:
Extended mobility tires are constructed
differently than other tires and could explode
during improper service. You or others could be
injured or killed if you attempt to repair, replace,
dismount, or mount an extended mobility tire.
Let only an authorized Goodyear
EMT
Service
Center repair, replace, dismount and mount
extended mobility tires.
The valve stems on your extended mobility tires have
sensors that are part of the TPM. These sensors contain
batteries which are designed to last for
10
years under
normal driving conditions. See your dealer if you ever
need
to
have a wheel replaced, or if the batteries in the
sensors ever need replacement.
NOTICE:
Using liquid sealants can damage the tire valves
and tire pressure monitor sensors in your
extended mobility tires. This damage would not
be covered by warranty. Don’t use liquid sealants
in your extended mobility tires.
If you feel that winter tires are needed for your driving
conditions, Goodyear Eagle M+S EMT tires are
available in your original equipment sizes from an
authorized Goodyear EMT retailer. These tires will
improve snow traction while maintaining your
Corvette’s extended mobility feature. When using
winter tires on your vehicle, be sure to use them on
all four wheels see “Buying New Tires” in the Index.
6-43
Inflation
--
Tire Pressure
The Tire-Loading Information label, which is on the
rear edge of the driver’s door shows the correct inflation
pressures for your tires when they’re cold. “Cold”
means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three
hours or driven no more than
1
mile
(1.6
km).
NOTICE:
Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation or
overinflation is all right. It’s not.
If
your tires
don’t have enough
air
(underinflation), you can
get the following:
0
Too much flexing
0
Too much heat
0
Tire overloading
0
Bad wear
Bad handling
0
Bad fuel economy.
NOTICE: (Continued)
NOTICE: (Continued)
If
your tires have too much air (overinflation).
you can get the following:
Unusual wear
Bad handling
0
Rough ride
0
Needless damage from road hazards.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more.
How
to
Check
With the Tire Pressure Monitor, you can check tire
inflation pressures while driving. After you’ve reached a
speed
of
15
mph
(24
kmh)
or more, press and release the
GAGES button on the Driver Information Center (DIC)
until the front tire pressures are displayed. Then, press
and release the GAGES button for the rear tire
pressures.
If
the display doesn’t show tire pressure, or if
the SERVICE TIRE
MON
SYS
message appears, see
your dealer for service.
Tire
Rotation
The tires on your Corvette are directional and are
different sizes front to rear. Due to this, your tires should
not be rotated. Each tire and wheel should be used only
in the position it is in.
When
It’s
Time for
New
Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires have
only 1/16 inch (1.6
mm)
or
less of tread remaining.
You need a new tire if
any
of the following statements
are true:
0
You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
0
You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
0
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep
enough to show cord or fabric.
The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or location
of the damage.
Buying
New Tires
To find out what kind and size
of
tires you need, look at
the Tire-Loading Information label.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way
your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed
to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating,
traction, ride and other things during normal service on
your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC number will be followed by an
“MS”
(for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
6-45
/i\
CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while
driving.
If
you mix tires of different sizes (other
than those originally installed on your vehicle) or
types (radial and bias-belted tires), the vehicle
may not handle properly, and you could have
a
crash. Using tires of different sizes (other than
those originally installed on your vehicle) may
also cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use
the correct size and type tires on all four wheels.
If
you
feel that winter tires are needed, see “Extended
Mobility
Tires” in the Index.
A
CAUTION:
If
you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
~
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving.
A
tire and/or wheel could
1
fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only radial-ply
~
tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
6-46
Uniform
Tire
Quality
Grading
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This
applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.) The
grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger
car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does
not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to
30
cm),
or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to Federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half
(1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded
100.
The relative performance
of
tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
Traction
--
A,
B,
C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are
A,
B,
and
C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A
tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and does not
include cornering (turning) traction.
6-47
Temperature
--
A,
B,
C
The temperature grades are
A
(the highest),
B,
and
C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No.
109.
Grades
B
and
A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required
by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that
is
properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation,
or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not
needed. However,
if
you notice unusual tire wear or
your vehicle pulling one
way
or the other, the alignment
may need to be reset.
If
you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on
a
smooth road,
your
wheels
may need to be rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the
same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new
GM
original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your
Corvette model.
6-48,
A
CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for replacement.
I
NOTICE:
The wrong wheel can also cause problems with
bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper
height, vehicle ground clearance and tire
clearance to the body and chassis.
A
CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which
it
is
fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When you change a
wheel, remove any rust or dirt from the places
where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an
emergency, you can use a cloth or paper towel to
do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush
later,
if
you need to, to get all the rust or dirt off.
I
A
CAUTION:
I
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.
If
you
do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel could
fall off, causing a serious accident.
6-49
I~~rrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose
and even come
off.
This could lead to an accident.
Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts.
If
you have
to replace them, be sure to get new
GM
original
equipment wheel nuts.
NOTICE:
Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to
brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification.
Used Replacement Wheels
Putting a used wheel
on
your vehicle is
dangerous.
You
can’t know how it’s been used or
how far it’s been driven. It could fail suddenly
and cause an accident.
If
you
have to replace a
wheel, use
a
new
GM
original equipment wheel.
Using
the
Wheel
Lock
Key
The wheel lock key sits in a small depression in
the
trunk
rail directly under the left-hand rear
compartment cover.
Your
vehicle’s wheel lock key has a unique registration
number. The registration number is printed on a card
included in your lock nut package.
Also,
on this card,
is
lost key replacement information. This number is not
recorded by
GM
or your dealer,
so
be sure not to lose
this card.
You
will need the information if you ever lose
your wheel lock key.
If
you or someone else is going to remove the wheels on
your vehicle, make sure that the special wheel nut socket
and wheel lock key
are
being used.
NOTICE:
Your wheels could be damaged
if
the wheel nut
socket
is
not used to remove your vehicle’s wheels.
The wheel nut socket can be used with
an
air wrench or
a torque wrench. The wheel lock key can be used with a
torque wrench, but not with an air or impact wrench.
I
NOTICE:
Your wheel lock key or lock nuts could be
damaged if an
air
or impact wrench
is
used with
this key.
Tire
Chains
NOTICE:
Don’t use tire chains. They can damage your
vehicle because there’s not enough clearance.
Use another type of traction device only
if
its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions.
To
help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device
if
it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’t
spin your wheels.
If
you do find traction devices that will
fit,
install
them on the rear tires.
6-51
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burst into flame if you strike a
match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space.
When you use anything from a container to clean your
vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings
and instructions. And always open your doors or
windows when you’re cleaning the inside.
Never
use these to clean your vehicle:
Gasoline
Benzene
Naphtha
0
Carbon Tetrachloride
0
Acetone
0
Paint Thinner
Turpentine
0
Lacquer Thinner
0
Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous
--
some more than
others
--
and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can.
In
many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
0
Alcohol
0
Laundry Soap
Bleach
0
Reducing Agents
Cleaning the Inside
of
Your Vehicle
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl or leather with a clean, damp cloth.
Your dealer has two cleaners, Multi-Purpose Interior
Cleaner and Capture Non-Solvent Dry Spot and Soil
Remover. They will clean normal spots and stains very
well. You can get GM-approved cleaning products from
your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials” in
the Index.)
Here are some cleaning tips:
0
Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
0
0
0
0
Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set.
Carefully scrape
off
any excess stain.
Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a
clean area often.
A
soft brush may be used if
stains
are
stubborn.
If a ring forms after spot cleaning, clean the entire
area immediately or it will set.
Fabric Protection
Your Corvette has carpet that has been treated with
Scotchgard" Fabric Protector, a 3M product. It protects
fabrics by repelling oil and water, which are the carriers
of most stains. Even with this protection, you still need
to clean your carpet often to keep it looking new.
Further information on cleaning is available by calling
1-800-433-3296 (in Minnesota, 1-800-642-6167).
Cleaning Vinyl
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
0
Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You
may have to do it more than once.
Things
like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if you
don't get them
off
quickly. Use a clean cloth and a
vinyVleather cleaner. See your dealer for this product.
Cleaning Coated Moldings
These moldings
are
around the hatch opening in your
Corvette's rear area.
When lightly soiled, wipe with a sponge or soft
0
When heavily soiled, use warm soapy water.
Cleaning Leather
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with
a
soft cloth. Then, let the
leather dry naturally.
Do
not use heat to dry.
lint-free cloth dampened with water.
0
0
0
For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. See your
dealer for this product.
Never
use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately.
If
dirt is allowed to work into the
finish, it can harm the leather.
6-53
Cleaning the
Top
of the Instrument Panel
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of
the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or
waxes may cause .annoying reflections in the windshield
and even make it difficult to see through the windshield
under certain conditions.
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft
cloth
or
sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.
Cleaning Soft-Touch Paint Surfaces
Use only mild soap and water to clean the Soft-Touch
paint surfaces in your Corvette.
Cleaning the Security Shade and
Convenience Net
Wash with warm water and mild detergent, rinse
with cold water and tumble dry on low. Do not use
chlorine bleach.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
Do
not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able
to
provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild soap and
lukewarm water.
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Glass should be cleaned often.
GM
Glass Cleaner
(GM
Part
No. 1050427) or a liquid household glass cleaner
will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films on
interior glass.
Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may
cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear
window, since they may have to be scraped
off
later.
If
abrasive cleaners are used
on
the inside
of
the rear
window, an electric defogger element may be damaged.
Any temporary license should not be attached across the
defogger grid.
Cleaning the Outside
of
the
Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap or other material may be on the blade
or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with GM
Windshield Cleaner, Bon Ami@ Powder (non-scratching
glass cleaning powder), GM Part
No.
105001
1. The
windshield is clean
if
beads do not form when you rinse
it with water.
If you use a glass treatment or conditioner containing
ethyl alcohol or ethyl sulfate on your glass, be sure
to
remove the acrylic roof panel, if
so
equipped. These
products may damage the panel.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping
vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every
six months. During very cold, damp weather more
frequent application may be required. (See
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.)
Cleaning a Removable
Roof
Panel
Special care is necessary when cleaning, removing
and/or storing the roof panel.
Flush with water to remove dust and dirt, then dry
the panel.
Clean the panel with GM Glass Cleaner. Leave the
cleaner
on
the panel for one minute, then wipe the
panel with a soft, lint-free cloth.
Don’t use abrasive cleaning materials.
If
water drops are frequently allowed to dry on the roof
panel, impurities in the water will adhere to the top.
These impurities may etch or mar the finish. When the
panel gets wet, you should dry it off.
6-55
NOTICE:
Do
not use a glass treatment or conditioner
containing ethyl alcohol or ethyl sulfate on the
roof panel. These products may damage the panel.
Cleaning the Outside
of
Your
Vehicle
The
paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Don’t use strong soaps or chemical detergents. Use
liquid hand, dish or car washing (mild detergent) soaps.
You
can get GM-approved cleaning products from your
dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the
Index.) Don’t use cleaning agents that
are
petroleum
based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning
agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to
dry
on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish
with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
NOTICE:
Conveyor systems on some automatic car washes
may damage a Corvette. They may not have
enough clearance for the undercarriage or for the
wide rear tires.
Check with the manager before using a car wash.
Cleaning Exterior LampsLenses
Use lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a liquid
hand, dish or car washing (mild detergent) soap to clean
exterior lamps and lenses. Follow instructions under
“Washing Your Vehicle.”
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint
finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials”
in the Index.)
Your Corvette has a “basecoatlclearcoat” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that
are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoatklearcoat
paint finish.
NOTICE:
I
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on
a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.
1
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.
If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years.
You
can help to keep the paint finish looking
new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Cleaning Your Convertible
Top
Your convertible top should be cleaned often. If you use
an automatic car wash, use one with water jets and
hanging cloths. High pressure car washes may cause
water to enter your vehicle.
When you hand wash the top, do it in partial shade. Use
a mild soap, lukewarm water and a soft sponge.
A
chamois or cloth may leave lint on the top, and a brush
can chafe the threads in the top fabric. Don’t use
detergents, harsh cleaners, solvents or bleaching agents.
Wet the entire vehicle and wash the top evenly to avoid
spots or rings. Let the soap remain on the fabric for a
few minutes. When the top is really dirty, use a mild
foam-type cleaner. Thoroughly rinse the entire vehicle,
then let the top dry in direct sunlight.
To
protect the convertible top:
After you wash the vehicle, make sure the top is
completely dry before you lower it.
Don’t get any cleaner on the vehicle’s painted finish;
If you decide to go through an automatic car wash,
ask the manager if the equipment could damage
your top.
it could leave streaks.
6-57
Cleaning Aluminum Wheels
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel.
A
wax
may then be applied.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface
of
your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners or
abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could
damage the surface.
Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface
of
these wheels.
Cleaning Tires
To
clean your tires, use
a
stiff brush with a tire cleaner.
I
NOTICE:
When applying a tire dressing always take care to
wipe
off
any overspray or splash from all painted
surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle.
Petroleum-based products may damage the
paint
finish.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer or other service
outlets. Larger areas
of
finish damage can be corrected
in
your dealer’s body and paint shop.
Magnesium Wheel Finish
NOTICE:
Improper paint repair
or
refinishing can cause
corrosion damage to a magnesium wheel. See
your
dealer if a magnesium wheel needs paint
repair or refinishing.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control
can collect on the underbody.
If
these are not removed,
accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on the underbody
parts such
as
fuel lines, frame,
floor
pan and exhaust
system even though they have corrosion protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and other debris can collect. Dirt packed in closed areas
of the frame should
be
loosened before being flushed.
Your
dealer or an underbody car washing system can do
this for you.
6-59
Fiberglass Springs Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped
NOTICE:
Don’t use corrosive or acidic cleaning agents,
the paint surface.
engine degreasers, aluminum cleaning agents or
discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched into
I
A
other harsh solvents to clean fiberglass springs;
they’ll damage the springs.
I
Although
no
defect in the paint
job
causes this,
GM
will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces
of
new
I
I
vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12
months or
12,000
miles
(20
000
km)
of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Appearance Care Materials Chart
PART
NUMBER
USAGE
DESCRIPTION SIZE
994954 Exterior polishing cloth
Polishing Cloth
-
Wax Treated 23 in. x 25 in.
1050172
Use on chrome, stainless steel, nickel, copper and brass
Chrome Cleaner and Polish 16
02.
(0.473
L)
1050173
Removes tar, road oil and asphalt
Tar
and Road Oil Remover 16
02.
(0.473 L)
1050174
I
16
oz.
(0.473 L)
I
White Sidewall Tire Cleaner
I
Removes soil and black
marks
from whitewalls
1050214
I
32
oz.
(0.946
L)
I
Vinyl Cleaner
I
Cleans vinyl tops, upholstery and convertible tops
I
1050427
I
23
02.
(0.680
L)
I
Glass Cleaner
I
Removes dirt, grime, smoke and fingerprints
1052870
I
16
02.
(0.473
L)
I
Wash Wax Concentrate
I
Cleans and lightly waxes
1052918**
I
8
02.
(0.237
L)
I
Armor
AUT’
Protectant
I
Protects leather, wood, acrylics, Plexiglas
,
plastic,
rubber and vinyl
1052925
I
16
02.
(0.473
L)
I
Multi-Purpose Interior Cleans carpets, seats, interior trim, door panels
I
Cleaner and floor mats
1052929
I
16
oz.
(0.473
L)
I
Wheel Cleaner
I
Spray on and rinse with water
1052930
Shines vehicle without scratching Synthetic Chamois
2.5
sq.
ft.
12345721
Cleans and shines a variety
of
surface types Armor All
TM
Cleaner 16
oz.
(0.473 L)
12345002
Attracts, absorbs and removes soils
Capture
Dry
Spot Remover
8
02.
(0.237
L)
12345725
See your General Motors Parts Department for these products.
**
Not recommended for use on instrument panel vinyl.
Removes contaminants, blemishes and swirl marks Surface Cleaner 16
oz.
(0.473 L) 12377984
Removes light scratches and oxidation and protects finish Cleaner
Wax
16
02.
(0.473 L)
12377966
Removes dust, fingerprints and surface contaminants Finish Enhancer 16
02.
(0.473 L)
12377964
Spray
on
tire shine Silicone Tire Shine 12
02.
(0.354 L)
See “Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
6-61
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
This
is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front comer of the instrument panel, on the
driver’s side. You can see it
if
you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service
Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The 8th character in your
VIN
is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts.
Service Parts Identification Label
You’ll find this label on the cover assembly for the rear
left-hand compartment storage pocket. It’s very helpful
if you ever need to order parts. On this label is:
0
your VIN,
the model designation,
paint information and
a list of all production options and special
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
equipment.
Electrical System
Add-on Electrical Equipment
NOTICE:
Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment
can keep other components from working as
they should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see “Servicing
Your
Air
Bag-Equipped Corvette” in the Index.
Accessory
Power
Plug
This plug can be used to connect electrical equipment
such as a cellular phone or
CB
radio. The accessory
power plug is located behind the passenger side
toe-board at the top left corner near the body control
module. Be sure to follow the installation instructions
included with the equipment.
To
use the accessory power plug:
1.
Remove the toe-board panel by lifting up on the
latches at the top of each corner of the panel.
2.
Locate the black connector at the left top corner of
the compartment near the body control module
above the two white diagnostic connectors.
3.
Disconnect the connector pigtail by pulling forward
on the plastic locking tab and pull the connection
apart from the wire harness.
The plug has three separate wires:
0
The orange wire connects to battery power.
The yellow wire connects to ignition power. Power is
only available
in
the ignition
ON
position.
0
The black wire connects to ground.
NOTICE:
When using the accessory plug:
0
0
a
a
DO
NOT
splice wires directly into the
vehicle electrical wire harness.
If
done
incorrectly, splicing may cause damage to
your electrical system and would not be,
covered by the vehicle’s warranty.
The maximum load
of
any electrical
equipment should not exceed
15
amps.
Be sure to turn
off
any electrical equipment
when not in use. Leaving electrical
equipment on for extended periods
of
time
can drain your battery.
DO NOT
use this plug
if
the electrical
equipment requires frequent connecting and
disconnecting.
This
may cause excessive wear
on the accessory plug and damage your
electrical system
and
the damage would not
be covered by your warranty.
6-63
Headlamps
The headlamp wiring is protected by a circuit breaker.
An electrical overload will cause the lamps to go on and
off,
or in some cases to remain
off.
If this happens, have
your headlamp wiring checked right away.
Windshield Wipers
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a fuse and
an internal circuit breaker. If the motor overheats due to
heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor
cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical
problem and not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power Options
Circuit breakers protect the power seats and other power
accessories. When the current load is too heavy, the
circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit
until the problem is fixed or goes away.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of maxi-fuses,
mini-fuses and circuit breakers. This greatly reduces the
chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size
and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have a
spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle that
you can get along without
--
like the radio or cigarette
lighter
--
and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can.
Instrument Panel
Fuse
Block
The interior fuse center is
on the passenger’s side of
the vehicle, under the
instrument panel and under
the toe-board. Remove the
toe-board and carpet
covering to access the fuse
block. Then turn the fuse
block door knob and pull
the door
to
access the fuses.
Look
at the silver-colored band inside the fuse.
If
the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
Fuse
1
2
3
4
5
Usage
Console Cigarette Lighter
Monitored (Inadvertent) Load Control
Lumbar Seat
Driver Seat Control Module
Radio
Fuse
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Usage
Parking Lamps, Taillamps
Cigarette Lighter
Stop Hazard Flashers
Body Control Module
Windshield Wipermasher
Accessory Power
Blank
Body Control Module
Crank
HazardPTurn Signal
Air
Bag
TONN
REL
(Convertible Only)
HVAC Controls
Instrument Panel Control
Cruise Control
Brake-Transmission Shift Interlock
Body Control Module
-
Ignition 3
6-65
Fuse
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Usage
Body Control Module
-
Ignition
2
Radio Antenna
Body Control Module
-
Ignition 1,
Instrument Panel Control
Hatcmrurik Release
HVAC Controls
Bose Speakers
Diagnostic
Right Door Control Module
Power Feed Door Right
Fuel Tank Door
Door Control Module Left
Power Feed Door Left
Driver Power Seat (Circuit Breaker)
Passenger Power Seat (Circuit Breaker)
Micro Relay
-
Monitored (Inadvertent)
Load
Control
Fuse
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
Usage
Micro Relay
-
Right Daytime Running
Lamp
Micro Relay
-
Hatch Release
Micro Relay
-
Left Daytime Running Lamp
TONN
REL (Convertible Only)
Micro Relay
-
Courtesy Lamps
Bose Mini Relay
-
Speakers
Mini Relay
-
Rear Defogger
Maxifuse
-
Ignition
1
Maxifuse
-
Rear Defogger
Blank
Maxifuse
-
Ignition 2
Maxifuse
-
Blower Motor
Starter
Blank
Maxi Circuit Breaker
-
Headlamps
Engine Compartment Fuse
Block
There is one fuse block in the engine compartment
located
on
the passenger’s side of the vehicle in front of
the battery.
Fuse
Usage
1
ABS TRANS
2
Approach
3
Right Headlamp Motor
4
Left Headlamp Motor
5
BLANK
6
Fog
Lamp
6-67
Fuse
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Usage
Selective Real Time Damping
Headlamp Low Beam Right
Headlamp High Beam Right
Headlamp Low Beam Left
Horn
Headlamp High Beam Left
Fuel Pump
Cooling Fan
-
Ignition 3
Oxygen Sensor
Powertrain Control Module
Throttle Control
Injector 2
Engine Ignition
Blank
Blank
Injector
1
Powertrain Control Module
Fuse
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
Usage
Air Conditioning
Blank
B 1,ank
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Micro Relay
-
Air
Pump
Micro Relay
-
Air Conditioner
and Clutch
Micro Relay
-
Fuel Pump
Micro Relay
-
Horn
Micro Relay
-
ABS
TRANS
Micro Relay
-
Back-up Lamps
Micro Relay
-
Fog Lamp
6-68
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
Fuse
Usage
40 Micro Relay
.
AIR
Solenoid
41 Micro Relay
.
Selective Real
Time Damping
Mini Relay
.
Ignition
Mini Relay
.
Cooling Fan 2
Mini Relay
.
Cooling Fan
3
Mini Relay
.
Cooling Fan 1
Maxi-Fuse
.
Cooling Fan 2
Blank
Blank
Maxi-Fuse
.
Cooling Fan 1
Maxi-Fuse
.
Air Pump
Blank
54
Maxi-Fuse
.
Anti-Lock Brakes
Anti-Lock Brakes and Selective Real
Time
Damping Electronics
Fuse Puller
Replacement
Bulbs
Console Compartment Flood
................
LED
Glove Box Lamp ......................... 194
Mirror Reading Lamps
....................
212-2
Visor Vanity Mirror
........................
37
Automatic Transmission Indicator
............
194
Underhood
...............................
1-2
IP
Courtesy Lamps
........................
194
Rear Courtesy ..........................
PC168
Headlamp High-Beam
....................
9005
Headlamp Low-Beam
....................
9006
Front ParkingKurn Signal
.............
3 157
NAK
Back-up
...............................
2057
Fog
....................................
893
Front Sidemarker
.........................
194
Rear Sidemarker
.........................
194
Stopmail Turn Signal
.....................
3057
License
.................................
194
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp ............. LED
6-69
Capacities and Specifications
Engine
vpe
....................................
V8
VIN Engine Code
LSl ...................................... G
Fuel Delivery
............
Sequential Multi-Port
Fuel Injection (SFI)
Valve Arrangement
.............
Overhead Valve
Piston Displacement
......................
5.7L
Bore
...................... 3.90 inches (9.9 cm)
Stroke
....................
3.62 inches (9.2 cm)
Compression Ratio
LSl
................................
10.1:l
Horsepower
LS1
..................................
345
Firing Order
..................
1-8-7-2-6-5-4-3
Thermostat Temperature
Specification
...................
187°F (86°C)
Replacement Parts
Air Cleaner Filter
......................
A917C
Battery
.............................
78A-72H
Coolant Surge Tank Cap
...
GM
Part
No.
10296465
15 psi (105 kPa)
Engine Oil Filter
........................
PF44
PCV Valve
............................. 799C
Serpentine Belt
AC Compressor
.........
GM
Part
No.
12556609
or equivalent
Water Pump, Generator,
Power Steering Pump
...
GM
Part
No.
12555225
Spark Plug
.............
41-93 1 (0.60 inch Gap)
or equivalent
Thermostat
............. GM
Part
No.
12555717
or equivalent
Windshield Wiper Blade
Length
...................
.22 inches (55.9 cm)
Type ............ 9
mm
x
3
mm
Shephard’s
Hook
6-70
Wheel Nuts
Wheel Nut Torque
..........
100 lb-ft (140 N-m)
Capacities (Approximate)
The following approximate capacities are given in
United States and metric conversions.
Air Conditioning
...
See the refrigerant information
label under the hood.
Automatic Transmission
Drain and Refill
................
5
quarts (4.7 L)
Overhaul
.................
10.8
quarts (10.2 L)
Coolant System
LS
1 (with M30
automatic transmission)
......
12.6 quarts (1 1.9
L)
LS
1 (with "6
manual transmission)
.......
12.9 quarts
(
12.2
L)
Crankcase
With Filter Change
...........
6.5 quarts (6.1 L)
Fuel Tank
.................
19.1 gallons (72.3 L)
Manual Transmission
Rear Axle
(Overhaul)
................
4.1 quarts (3.8
1
L)
Lubricant .................. 1.5 quarts (1 -42
L)
Limited Slip Additive
.........
4 ounces
(1
18
ml)
Tire Pressures
......
See Tire-Loading Information
label on rear edge of driver's door.
NOTE:
All capacities are approximate. When adding,
be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended
in this manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Vehicle Dimensions
Wheelbase
.............. 104.5 inches (265.4 cm)
Tread
Front
..................
62.1 inches (157.7 cm)
Rear .................... .62 inches (157.4 cm)
Length
.................
179.7 inches (456.4 cm)
Width
...................
73.6 inches
(1
86.9 cm)
Height
..................
47.7 inches
(1
21.1 cm)
6-71
Power Curves
400
r
1
6oo
500
LT
400
E
300
3
I
(I)
W
w
3
200
E
P
25
t
1
loo
Accessory Belt Routing
ENGINE
SPEED RPM
Air Conditioning Refrigerants
Not all air conditioning refrigerants
are
the same.
If the air conditioning system in your vehicle needs
refrigerant, be sure the proper refrigerant is used.
If
you're not sure, ask your dealer.
6-72
k%
NOTES
6-73
@%
NOTES
Section
7
Maintenance
Schedule
This section covers the maintenance required
for
your Corvette. Your vehicle needs these services to retain its safety,
dependability and emission control performance.
7-2
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
Introduction
Your Vehicle and the Environment
How
This Section is Organized
Part
A:
Scheduled Maintenance Services
Maintenance Schedule
7-11
7-15
7- 16
7-18
Part
B:
Owner Checks and Services
Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections
Part
D:
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Part
E:
Maintenance Record
7-1
Introduction
IMPORTANT.
KEEP ENGINE
OIL
AT
THE
PROPER
-EVEL
AND
CHANGE
RECOMMENDED
protection
I
Plan
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance procedures
are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality
of
the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level
of emissions from your vehicle.
To
help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good
condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.
Have you purchased the
GM
Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties, See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet, or your
GM
dealer for details.
7-2
How
This Section is Organized
The remainder of this section is divided into five parts:
“Part
A:
Scheduled Maintenance Services” shows
what to have done and how often. Some
of
these
services can be complex,
so
unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should
let your dealer’s service department or another qualified
service center do these jobs.
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some
jobs,
you can
be seriously injured.
Do
your own maintenance
work only if
you
have the required know-how
and the proper tools and equipment for the job.
If
you have any doubt, have a qualified
technician do the work.
If
you are skilled enough to do some work on your
vehicle, you will probably want to get the service
information. See “Service and Owner Publications”
in the Index.
“Part
B:
Owner Checks and Services” tells you what
should be checked and when. It also explains what you
can easily do to help keep your vehicle
in
good condition.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains
important inspections that your dealer’s service department
or another quaMied service center should perform.
“Part
D:
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists
some recommended products to help keep your vehicle
properly maintained. These products,
or
their
equivalents, should be used whether you do the work
yourself or have it done.
“Part
E:
Maintenance Record” provides a place for
you to record the maintenance performed on your
vehicle. Whenever any maintenance is performed, be
sure to write it down in this part. This will help you
determine when your next maintenance should be done.
In addition, it is a good idea to keep your maintenance
receipts. They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for
warranty repairs.
7-3
Part
A:
Scheduled Maintenance
Services
Using
Your
Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we don’t know
exactly how you’ll drive it. You may drive very short
distances only a few times a week. Or you may drive
long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather.
You may use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or
you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many
other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may even need
more frequent checks and replacements than you’ll find
in the schedules in this section.
So
please read this
section and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good
condition, see your GM dealer.
This part tells you the maintenance services you should
have done and when you should schedule them. If you
go to your dealer for your service needs, you’ll
know
that GM-trained and supported service people will
perform the work using genuine GM parts.
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in
Part
D.
Make sure whoever services your vehicle
uses these. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s
Tire-Loading Information label. See “Loading Your
Vehicle” in the Index.
are
driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
use the recommended fuel. See “Fuel” in the Index.
I
Maintenance Schedule
I
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(160
000
km)
should be performed after
100,000
miles
(160 000
km)
at the same intervals. The services shown
at
150,000
miles (240
000
km)
should be performed at
the same interval after
150,000
miles (240
000
km).
See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” following.
Footnotes
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emissions warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that
all
recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance
be recorded.
*
Your Corvette has an Engine Oil Life Monitor. This
monitor will show you when to change the oil -- usually
between
3,000
miles
(5
000
km)
and
10,000
miles
(16
000
km)
since your last oil change. Under severe
conditions, the indicator may come on before
3,000
miles
(5
000
km).
Never drive your vehicle more
than
10,000
miles
(1
6
000
km)
or
12
months without
an oil change. Use engine oil meeting the GM
Standard
GM47
18M.
The Engine Oil Life Monitor won’t detect dust in the
oil. So if you drive in a dusty area, be sure to change
your oil every
3,000
miles
(5
000
km)
or sooner if the
CHANGE
OIL
light comes on. Remember to reset the
Oil Life Monitor when the oil has been changed. For
more information, see “Engine Oil Life Monitor” in
the Index.
7-5
I
Maintenance Schedule
I
10,000
Miles
(16
000
km)
0
Check the Engine Oil Life Monitor.
If
engine oil and filter are changed, reset
MILEAGE
the Engine Oil Life Monitor. See “Engine Oil” in the Index.
An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote
*.)
if necessary.
An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote
“f)
Inspect
air
cleaner filter
if
you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter
20,000
Miles
(32
000
km)
El
Check the Engine Oil Life Monitor. If engine oil and filter are changed, reset
MILEAGE
the Engine Oil Life Monitor. See “Engine Oil”
in
the Index.
An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote
*.)
if necessary.
An
Emission Control Service.
(See footnote
“f)
[7
Inspect air cleaner filter
if
you
are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter
30,000
Miles
(48
000
km)
Check the Engine Oil Life Monitor.
If
engine oil and filter are changed, reset
MILEAGE
the
Engine Oil Life Monitor, See “Engine Oil” in the Index.
An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote
*.)
17
Replace air cleaner filter.
An
Emission Control Service.
0
Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket
for any damage. Replace parts as needed.
An
Emission Control Service,
(See footnote
T.)
7-6
Maintenance Schedule
40,000
Miles
(64
000
km)
0
Check the Engine Oil Life Monitor. If engine oil and filter
are
changed, reset
the Engine Oil Life Monitor. See “Engine Oil” in the Index.
An
Emission Control Service.
(See footnote
*.)
if necessary.
An
Emission Control Service.
(See footnote
“f)
Inspect air cleaner filter if you
are
driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter
50,000
Miles
(80
000
km)
0
0
Check the Engine Oil Life Monitor. If engine oil and filter
are
changed, reset
the Engine Oil Life Monitor.
See
“Engine Oil” in the Index.
An
Emission Control Service.
(See footnote
*.)
Inspect air cleaner filter if you
are
driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter
if necessary.
An
Emission Control Service.
(See
footnote
“f)
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
-
In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches
90°F
-
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
-
Uses such as high performance operation.
If
you
do not use your vehicle under any
of
these conditions, change the fluid
and filter at
100,000
miles
(166
000
km).
Manual transmission fluid doesn’t
require change.
(32
O
C) or higher.
I
DATE
I
DATE
SERVICED
BY
7-7
I
Maintenance Schedule
1
60,000
Miles
(96
000
km)
Check the Engine Oil Life Monitor. If engine oil and filter are changed, reset
the Engine Oil Life Monitor. See “Engine Oil” in the Index.
An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote
*.)
Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket
for any damage. Replace
parts
as needed.
An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote
T.)
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
70,000
Miles (112
000
km)
0
Check the Engine Oil Life Monitor. If engine oil and filter are changed, reset
the Engine Oil Life Monitor. See “Engine Oil” in the Index.
An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote
*.)
Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter
if necessary.
An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote
“f)
DATE
I
DATE
I
MILEAGE
80,000
Miles (128
000
km)
0
Check the Engine Oil Life Monitor.
If
engine oil and filter are changed, reset
the Engine Oil Life Monitor. See “Engine Oil” in the Index.
An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote
*.)
if necessary.
An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote
“f.)
0
Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter
7-8
I
Maintenance Schedule
I
90,000
Miles
(144
000
km)
0
Check the Engine Oil Life Monitor.
If
engine oil and filter are changed, reset
the Engine Oil Life Monitor. See “Engine Oil” in the Index.
An
Emission Control Service.
(See footnote
*.)
0
Replace air cleaner filter.
An
Emission Control Service.
I
DATE
I
n
MILEAGE
ACTUAL
SERVICED
BY:
Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage
or
leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket
for any damage. Replace parts as needed.
An
Emission Control Service.
(See footnote
“f)
100,000
Miles
(It50
000
km)
Check the Engine Oil Life Monitor.
If
engine oil and filter are changed, reset
the Engine Oil Life Monitor. See “Engine Oil” in the Index.
MILEAGE
An
Emission Control Service.
(See footnote
*.)
necessary.
An
Emission Control Service.
(See footnote
T.)
0
Inspect air cleaner filter
if
you
are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter if
0
Replace spark plugs.
An
Emission
Control
Service.
0
Inspect spark plug wires.
An
Emission Control Service.
(Continued)
7-9
Maintenance Schedule
100,000
Miles
(160
000
km)
(Continued)
0
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter
if
the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
-
In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches
90°F
(32
O
C)
or higher.
-
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
-
Uses such as high performance operation.
Manual transmission fluid doesn’t require change.
0
If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe conditions listed previously and,
therefore, haven’t changed your automatic transmission fluid, change
both
the
fluid and the filter. Manual transmission fluid doesn’t require change.
150,000
Miles
(240
000
km)
0
Drain, flush and refill the cooling system (or every
60
months since last
service, whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for
what to use.
An
Emission
Control
Sewice.
DATE
I
MILEAGE
7-10
I
Part
B:
Owner Checks and Services
Listed below are owner checks and services which
should be performed at the intervals specified to help
ensure the safety, dependability and emission control
performance of your vehicle.
Be
sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they
are
the proper ones, as shown
in
Part
D.
At
Each Fuel Fill
It is important
for
you
or
a service station attendant to
pe$om these underhood checks at each fuel
fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil
if necessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Index for
further details.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL@
coolant mixture
if necessary. See “Engine Coolant” in
the Index for further details.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the
windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if
necessary.
See
“Windshield Washer Fluid” in the Index
for further details.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures. See
“Tires” in the Index for further details.
Cassette Deck Service
Clean cassette deck. Cleaning should be done every
50
hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems” in the
Index for further details.
Power Antenna Service
Clean power antenna mast. See “Audio Systems” in the
Index for further details.
7-11
At Least Twice a Year
Automatic Transmission Inspection
Restraint System Check
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are
working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged
safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might
keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it
repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.
Also look for any opened or broken
air
bag coverings,
and have them repaired or’replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Wiper Blade Check
Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace blade
inserts that appear
worn
or damaged or that streak or
miss
areas
of
the windshield. Also see “Wiper Blades.
Cleaning” in the Index.
Manual Transmission Check
Check the transmission fluid level; add if needed. See
“Manual Transmission” in the Index. Check for leaks.
A fluid loss may indicate a problem. Have the system
inspected and repaired
if
needed.
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid
loss. Check for leaks.
If
a
leak occurs, take the vehicle to
your GM dealership Service Department and have it
repaired as soon as possible.
At Least Once
a
Year
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part D.
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all body door hinges. Also lubricate all hinges
and latches, including those for the hood, rear
compartment, console door and any folding seat
hardware.
Part
D tells you what to use. More frequent
lubrication may be required when exposed to a
corrosive environment.
Starter Switch Check
-
I
A
CAUTION:
Brake-Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) Check
(Automatic Transmission)
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly.
If
it does, you or others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough
room
2.
Firmly apply both the parking brake (see “Parking
around the vehicle.
Brake” in the Index if necessary) and the
regular brake.
NOTE:
Do
not use the accelerator pedal, and be
ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3.
On automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the
engine in each gear. The starter should work only in
PARK
(P)
or NEUTRAL (N). If the starter works in
any other position, your vehicle needs service.
On manual transmission vehicles, put the shift lever
in
NEUTRAL (N), push the clutch down halfway
and try to start the engine. The starter should work
only when the clutch is pushed down all the way to
the floor.
If
the starter works when the clutch isn’t
pushed all the way down, your vehicle needs service.
I
A
CAUTION:
I
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly.
If
it does, you
or
others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
1.
Before you start, be sure you have enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked
on a level surface.
2.
Firmly apply the parking brake (see “Parking Brake”
in the Index if necessary).
NOTE: Be ready to apply the regular brake
immediately if the vehicle begins to move.
3.
With the engine off,
turn
the key to the
ON
position,
but don’t start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) with normal
effort.
If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle’s BTSI
needs service.
7-13
Ignition Automatic Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition key to
OFF
in each shift lever position. The
key should turn to
OFF
only when the shift lever is in
PARK (P).
On all vehicles, the key should come out only in
OFF.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission
PARK
(P)
Mechanism Check
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You
or
others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there
is
room in front
of
your vehicle in case
it
begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake
at
once should the vehicle begin to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
0
To
check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL
(N),
slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal.
Do
this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
To check the PARK
(P)
mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release all brakes.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to
flush
any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
Part
C:
Periodic Maintenance
Inspections
Listed below are inspections and services which should
be performed at least twice a year (for instance, each
spring and fall).
You
should let your dealer’s service
department or other qualified service center do these jobs.
Make sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Proper procedures to perform these services may be
found in a service manual. See “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.
Steering and Suspension Inspection
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering
system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of
wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering
lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc.
Tire and Wheel Inspection
Inspect the tires for uneven wear or damage. If there is
irregular or premature wear, check the wheel alignment.
Inspect for damaged wheels.
Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body
near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged,
missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams,
holes, loose connections or other conditions which could
cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let
exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See “Engine Exhaust”
in the Index.
Radiator and Heater Hose Inspection
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they
are
cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes, fittings
and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the outside of the
radiator and air conditioning condenser.
To
help ensure
proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling system
and pressure cap is recommended at least once a year.
Rear Axle Service
Check the gear lubricant level in the rear axle and add if
needed. See “Rear Axle” in the Index.
A
fluid loss may
indicate a problem. Check the axle and repair it
if
needed.
Brake System Inspection
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and
rotors for surface condition. Inspect other brake parts,
including calipers, parlung brake, etc. You may need to
have your brakes inspected more often if your driving
habits or conditions result in frequent braking.
7-15
Part
D:
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number
or
specification may be obtained from
your dealer.
USAGE
Engine Oil
FLUIDLUBRICANT
The engine requires a special
Engine Oil meeting GM Standard
GM4718M. Oils meeting this
Standard may be identified as
synthetic, and should
also
be
identified with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For
Gasoline Engines “Starburst”
symbol. However, not all
Synthetic API oils with the
Starburst symbol will meet this
GM Standard. You should look for
and use only an oil that meets GM
Standard GM47 18M. For the
proper viscosity, see “Engine Oil”
in the Index.
USAGE
~~
Engine Coolant
Hydraulic Brake
System
Hydraulic Clutch
System
~
Power Steering
System
Manual
Transmission
Automatic
Transmission
FLUIDLUBRICANT
50/50
mixture of clean water
(preferably distilled) and use only
GM Goodwrench@ DEX-COOL@
or Havoline@ DEX-COOL@
Coolant. See “Engine Coolant” in
the Index.
Delco Supreme
11
@
Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. 12377967
or
equivalent DOT-3 Brake Fluid).
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid (GM Part
No. 12345347 or equivalent
DOT-3 Brake Fluid).
GM Synthetic Power Steering
Fluid
(GM
Part No. 12345866 or
12345867 or equivalent).
DEXRON@-I11 Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
DEXRON@
-111
Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
USAGE
Key Lock
Cylinders
Rear Axle
(Limited-Slip
Differential)
Windshield
Washer Solvent
FLUIDLUBRICANT
Multi-Pu ose Lubricant,
Superlube
%
(GM Part
No.
12346241 or equivalent).
Axle Lubricant (GM Part
No.
12345977) and 4 ounces
(1
18 ml) of Limited-Slip
Differential Lubricant Additive
(GM Part
No.
1052358 or
equivalent) where required. See
“Rear Axle” in the Index.
GM Optikleen@ Washer Solvent
(GM Part
No.
1051515) or
equivalent.
USAGE
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Pivots, Spring
Anchor and
Release Pawl
Hood and Door
Hinges
-
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
FLUIDLUBRICANT
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM
Part
No.
12346293 or equivalent)
or lubricant meeting requirements
of NLGI
#
2,
Category
LB
or
GC-LB.
Multi-Pu ose Lubricant,
Superlube
%
(GM Part
No.
12346241 or equivalent).
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM
Part
No.
12345579 or equivalent).
7-17
Part
E:
Maintenance Record
Any additional information from “Owner Checks and
Services’’ or “Periodic Maintenance’’ can be added
on
After the scheduled services are performed, record the the following record pages. Also,
you
should retain all
date, odometer reading and who performed the service maintenance receipts. Your owner information portfolio
in
the boxes provided after the maintenance interval. is a convenient place to store them.
Maintenance Record
ODOMETER
DATE MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
SERVICED
BY
READING
7-18
Maintenance Record
7-19
Maintenance Record
ODOMETER
DATE READING
Maintenance Record
SERVICED
BY
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
7-21
Maintenance Record
Section
8
Customer Assistance Information
Here you will find out how to contact Chevrolet if you need assistance. This section also tells you how to obtain
service publications and how to report any safety defects.
8-2
8-4
8-5
8-7
8-8
8-9
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users
Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Program
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Courtesy Transportation
GM Participation in an Alternative Dispute
Resolution Program
Warranty Information
Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Reporting Safety Defects
to
General Motors
Ordering Service and Owner Publications
in Canada
8- 10
8-
10
8-11
8-11
8-11
8-1
Chevrolet dealers have the facilities, trained technicians
and up-to-date information to promptly address any
concerns
you
may have. However, if a concern has not
been resolved to your complete satisfaction, take the
following steps:
STEP
ONE
--
Discuss your concern with a member
of dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner
of
the dealership or the
general manager.
STEP
TWO
--
If
after contacting a member of
dealership management, it appears your concern
cannot be resolved by the dealership without further
help, contact the Chevrolet Customer Assistance
Center by calling 1-800-222- 1020. In Canada,
contact
GM
of
Canada Customer Communication
Centre in Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777
(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
For
help outside of the United States and Canada, call
the following numbers as appropriate:
In
Mexico: (525) 625-3256
In
Puerto Rico: 1-800-496-9992 (English) or
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
In
the
U.S.
Virgin Islands: 1-800-496-9994
In
the Dominican Republic: 1-800-75 1-4135
(English) or 1-800-75 1-41 36 (Spanish)
In
the Bahamas: 1-800-389-0009
In
Bermuda, Barbados, Antigua and the British
Virgin Islands: 1-800-534-0122
In
all other Caribbean countries: (809) 763-13
15
@
In
other overseas locations, call GM Overseas
Distribution Corporation
in
Canada at:
(905) 644-4112.
8-3
For prompt assistance, please have the following
information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
a
a
0
a
0
Your name, address, home and business
telephone numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (This is available
from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at
the top left of the instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.)
Dealership name and location
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
Nature of concern
We encourage you to call us
so
we can give your inquiry
prompt attention. However, if you wish to write
Chevrolet, address your inquiry to:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O.
Box
7047
Troy, MI
48007-7047
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel
Sam
Drive
Oshawa, Ontario LlH
8P7
Refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance
Information booklet for addresses of
GM Overseas offices.
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that
your concern will likely be resolved in the dealership,
using the dealer’s facilities, equipment and personnel.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if
you have a concern.
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone
(TTY)
Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones
(TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with
Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV. (TTY users in
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Chevrolet Roadside
Assistance Program
n
To enhance Chevrolet's strong commitment to customer
satisfaction, Chevrolet is excited to announce the
establishment of the Chevrolet Roadside Assistance
Center.
As
the owner of a
1998
Chevrolet, membership
in Roadside Assistance is free.
Roadside Assistance is available
24
hours a day,
365
days a year, by calling 1-800-CHEV-USA
(1-800-243-8872).
This toll-free number will provide
you over-the-phone roadside assistance with minor
mechanical problems. If
your
problem cannot be
resolved over the phone, our advisors have access to a
nationwide network of dealer recommended service
providers. Roadside membership is free, however some
services may incur costs.
Roadside offers two levels of service to the customer,
Basic Care
and
Courtesy" Care:
Toll-free number,
1
-800-CHEV-USA
Free towing for warranty repairs
Basic over-the-phone technical advice
Available dealer services at reasonable costs (i.e.,
wrecker services, locksmithkey service, glass
repair, etc.)
8-5
ROADSIDE
Courtesy" Care
PROVIDES:
0
Roadside
Basic Care
services (as outlined previously)
Plus:
FREE Non-Warranty Towing (to the closest dealer
0
FREE LocksmitldKey Service (when keys
are
lost
from a legal roadway)
on the road or locked inside)
e
FREE Jump Start (at home or on the road)
0
FREE Fuel Delivery
($5
of fuel delivered on
the road)
Chevrolet offers Courtesy Transportation for customers
needing warranty service. Courtesy Transportation will
be offered in conjunction with the coverage provided by
the Bumper to Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warranty
to eligible purchasers of 1998 Chevrolet passenger car
and light duty trucks. (Please see your selling dealer
for details.)
Note:
Courtesy Care
is available to retail and retail lease
customers operating 1998 and newer Chevrolet vehicles
for a period of 3 years/36,000 miles (60
000
km),
whichever occurs first. All
Courtesy Care
services must
be pre-arranged by Chevrolet Roadside
or
dealer
Service Management.
Basic Care
and
Courtesy Care
are
not part of or
included in the coverage provided by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet reserves the right to
modify or discontinue
Basic Care
and
Courtesy Care
at any time.
For complete program details, see your Chevrolet dealer
to
obtain a Roadside Assistance Center brochure.
The Roadside Assistance Center uses companies that
will provide you with quality and priority service. When
roadside services are required,
our
advisors
will
explain
any payment obligations that may be incurred for
utilizing outside services.
For prompt assistance when calling, please have the
following available to give to the advisor:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
License plate number
Vehicle color
Vehicle location
Telephone number where you can be reached
Vehicle mileage
Description of problem
Please refer
to
the Roadside Assistance brochure
inside your owner information portfolio for full
program details.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
separate brochure provided by the dealer or call
1-800-268-6800
for emergency services.
8-7
Courtesy
Transportation
Chevrolet offers Courtesy Transportation for customers
needing warranty service. Courtesy Transportation will
be offered in conjunction with the coverage provided by
the Bumper to Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warranty
to retail purchasers
of
1998 Chevrolet passenger cars
and light duty trucks (please see your selling dealer
for details).
Courtesy Transportation includes:
0
e
0
0
One way shuttle ride for any warranty repair
completed during the same day.
Up to
$30
maximum daily vehicle rental allowance
for any overnight warranty repair up to five days, OR
Up to
$30
maximum daily cab, bus or other
transportation allowance in lieu
of
rental for any
overnight warranty repair
up
to five days, OR
Up to $10
daily
fuel
allowance for rides provided by
another person (i.e., fkiend, neighbor, etc.)
in
lieu of
rental for any overnight warranty repair
up
to five days.
Note: All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by your Chevrolet dealer
service management. Claim amounts should
reflect all actual costs.
0
Chevrolet Courtesy Transportation is not part of the
Bumper to Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
Chevrolet reserves the right to make any changes or
discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time
without notification.
Chevrolet dealer.
0
For additional program details, contact your
Some state insurance regulations make it impractical to
rent vehicles to people under 21 years of age.
If
you are
under 21 and have difficulty renting a vehicle, Chevrolet
will reimburse up to $3O/day for documented
transportation you receive.
For warranty repairs during the Complete Vehicle
Coverage period in the New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
interim transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult your
dealer for details. The Roadside Assistance program is
available only in the United States and Canada.
In
Canada,
please consult your
GM
dealer for
information
on
Courtesy Transportation.
8-8
GM
Participation in an Alternative
Dispute Resolution Program
This
program is available in all
50
states and the District
of Columbia. Canadian owners refer to your Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP). General Motors reserves the right to
change eligibility limitations and/or to discontinue its
participation in this program.
Both Chevrolet and your Chevrolet dealer are committed
to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new
vehicle. Our experience has shown that,
if
a situation
arises where you feel
your
concern has not been
adequately addressed, the Customer Satisfaction Procedure
described earlier
in
this section is very successful.
There may be instances where an impartial third party
can assist in arriving at a solution to a disagreement
regarding vehicle repairs or interpretation of the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. To assist in resolving these
disagreements, Chevrolet voluntarily participates in
BBB AUTO LINE.
BBB AUTO LINE is an out-of-court program
administered by the Better Business Bureau system to
settle automotive disputes. This program
is
available
free of charge to customers who currently own or lease a
GM vehicle.
If you are not satisfied after following the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure, you may contact the BBB using
the toll-free telephone number, or write them at the
following address:
BBB AUTO
LINE
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200
Wilson Boulevard
Suite
800
Arlington, VA
22203-
1804
Telephone:
1-800-955-5100
To file a claim, you will be asked to provide your name
and address, your Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN)
and a statement of the nature of your complaint.
Eligibility is limited by vehicle age and mileage, and
other factors.
8-9
We prefer you utilize the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure before you resort to AUTO LINE, but you
may contact the BBB at any time. The BBB will attempt
to resolve the complaint serving as an intermediary. If
this mediation is unsuccessful, an informal hearing will
be scheduled where eligible customers may present their
case to an impartial third-party arbitrator.
The arbitrator will make a decision which you may
accept or reject. If you accept the decision, GM will be
bound by that decision. The entire dispute resolution
procedure should ordinarily take about 40 days from the
time you file a claim until a decision is made.
Some state laws may require you to use this program
before filing a claim with a state-run arbitration program
or
in the courts. For further information, contact the
BBB at 1-800-955-5
100
or the Chevrolet Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-222- 1020.
Warranty Information
Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet
that contains detailed warranty information.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO THE UNITED STATES
GOVERNMENT
If
you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to
notifying General Motors.
If
NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the
Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO
THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition
to
notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
Box 8880
Ottawa, Ontario KlG 352
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO
GENERAL MOTORS
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)
in a situation like this, we certainly hope you'll notify
us. Please call us' at 1-800-222- 1020 or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 7047
Troy, MI 48007-7047
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario LlH 8P7
Ordering Service and Owner
Publications in Canada
Service manuals, owner's manuals and other service
literature are available for purchase for all current and
past model General Motors vehicles.
The toll-free telephone number for ordering information
in Canada is 1-800-668-5539.
8-11
1998
CHEVROLET SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION
The following publications covering the operation and servicing of your vehicle can be purchased by filling out
the Service Publication Order Form in this book and mailing it in with your check, money order,
or credit card information to Helm, Incorporated (address below.)
CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR
1998
CHEVROLET
SERVICE MANUALS
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information
on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes,
electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$90.00
TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE, TRANSFER CASE
UNIT REPAIR MANUAL
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments and specifications for the
1998
GM transmissions, transaxles and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$40.00
SERVICE BULLETINS
Service Bulletins give technical service information needed
to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks.
Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the
1
diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
OWNER’S INFORMATION
Owner publications are written directly for Owners and
intended to provide basic operational information about the
vehicle. The owner’s manual will include the Maintenance
Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$1
5.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$1
0.00
CURRENT
&
PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS
Service Publications are available for current and past
model GM vehicles. To request an order form, please
specify year and model name of the vehicle.
r
&
NOTES
Section
9
Index
Accessory Outlet
..............................
2-59
Accessory Power Plug ........................... 6-63
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle
......
6-3
AirBag
.......................................
1-18
How Does it Restrain
..........................
1-23
How
it Works
................................
1-20
Location
...............................
1.20. 1-21
Servicing ................................... 1-24
What Makes it Inflate
..........................
1-22
What Will
You
See After it Inflates
...............
1-23
When Should it Inflate
.........................
1-22
Air Bag Readiness Light
....................
1.20. 2.78
AirBagSystem ................................ 1-18
Aircleaner
....................................
6-16
Air Conditioning
.......................
3.3. 3.7. 3.10
Alignment and Balance. Tire
......................
6-48
Aluminum Wheels. Cleaning
......................
6-58
Antenna
Integrated ...................................
3-30
PowerMast
.................................
3-29
Antifreeze
.....................................
6-22
Anti-Lock
Brakes
......................................
4-7
Brake System Warning Light
................
2.78. 4.7
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light
.............
2-80
Anti-Theft Radio
...............................
3-25
Appearance Care
...............................
6-52
Appearance Care Materials
.......................
6-6 1
Arbitration Program
..............................
8-9
Ashtray
.......................................
2-58
Audio Equipment. Adding ........................ 3-27
Automatic
Audio Systems
.................................
3-12
Electronic Dual Climate Control System
............
3-4
Overdrive
...................................
2-28
Transmission Check
...........................
7-12
Transmission Fluid
............................
6-18
Transmission. Operation
.......................
2-26
Transmission. Park Mechanism Check
............
7-14
Transmission. Shifting
.........................
2-26
Transmission. Starting Your Engine
..............
2-22
Axle. Limited-Slip Rear
.........................
2-39
Axle. Rear
....................................
6-21
Back-up Lamp Bulb Replacement ................. 6-37
Battery ....................................... 6-32
Jump Starting
.................................
5-3
Replacement. Remote Function
Actuation (RFA) System
......................
2-12
Warnings
................................
5-3.
5-5
BBB Auto Line
.................................
8-9
Belt. Engine Accessory .......................... 6-72
Better Business Bureau Mediation
...................
8-9
Blizzard
......................................
4-26
Brake
Adjustment
..................................
6-31
Fluid
.......................................
6-29
9-1
Brake (Continued)
Master Cylinder
..............................
6-29
Parking ..................................... 2-32
PedalTravel
.................................
6-31
Replacing System Parts
........................
6-32
System Warning Light
.........................
2-79
Transmission Shift Interlock
....................
2-36
Wear
.......................................
6-31
Brakes. Anti-Lock
...............................
4-7
Brake-Transmission Shift Interlock Check
...........
7- 13
Braking
........................................
4-6
Braking in Emergencies
...........................
4-9
Break.In. New Vehicle
..........................
2-20
BTSI
.........................................
2-36
BTSICheck
...................................
7-13
Bulb Replacement ......................... 6.33. 6.69
Canadian Roadside Assistance
....................
8-7
Capacities and Specifications
......................
6-70
Carbon Monoxide
....................
2.15.2.37. 4.28
Cassette Deck Service
...........................
7-
11
Cassette Tape Player
............................
3-12
CareofYour
.................................
3-28
Center Console
.................................
2-55
Certification Label
..............................
4-29
Chains. Tire
...................................
6-51
Check Gages Light
..............................
2-85
Checking Your Restraint Systems .................. 1-37
Chemical Paint Spotting .......................... 6-60
Child Restraints ................................ 1-27
Add-on
.....................................
1-27
Securing in the Passenger Seat Position
...........
1-28
Top Strap
....................................
1-3
1
Types
......................................
1-27
WheretoPut
................................
1-27
Cigarette Lighter
...............................
2-58
Circuit Breakers and Fuses
.......................
6-64
Cleaner. Air
...................................
6-16
Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels
............................
6-58
Coated Moldings
.............................
6-53
ConvenienceNet
.............................
6-54
Exterior LampsLenses
........................
6-56
Fabric ...................................... 6-53
Glass
.......................................
6-54
Inside of Your Vehicle
.........................
6-52
Instrument Panel
.............................
6-54
Leather
.....................................
6-53
Outside of Your Vehicle ........................ 6-56
Removable Roof Panel
.........................
6-55
Security Shade
...............................
6-54
Soft-Touch Paint Surfaces
......................
6-54
Stains
......................................
6-53
Tires
.......................................
6-58
Vinyl
.......................................
6-53
Weatherstrips ................................ 6-55
Wheels
.....................................
6-58
Windshield and Wiper Blades
...................
6-55
Climate Control. Automatic Electronic Dual
...........
3-4
Clock. Setting the
...............................
3-12
Clutch. Hydraulic
...............................
6-20
Comfort Controls ................................ 3-1
Comfort Controls. Manual
.........................
3-2
Compact Disc
AdapterKit
..................................
3-17
Care ....................................... 3-29
.
Changer. TmnkMounted
.......................
3-21
9-2
Player
......................................
3-17
Care
.......................................
3-29
Competitive Driving
............................
2-24
Console. Center
...........................
..
....
2-55
Control of a Vehicle
..............................
4-5
Convenience Net
...............................
2-57
Convenience Net. Cleaning ....................... 6-54
Convertible Top
................................
2-68
Convex Outside Mirror
..........................
2-54
Coolant
.............................
5.13.5.16. 6.22
SurgeTank
..................................
5-18
Surge Tank Pressure Cap
.......................
6-26
Coolant Heater. Engine
..........................
2-24
CoolingSystem
................................
5-16
Courtesy Lamps
................................
2-52
InCanada
....................................
8-8
1ntheU.S.
...................................
8-8
Cruise Control
.................................
2-47
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone Users
.........
8-4
Customer Assistance Infomation
...................
8-
1
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
....................
8-2
Damage. Finish
...............................
6-59
Daytime Running Lamps
.........................
2-50
Dead Battery
...................................
5-3
Defects. Reporting Safety
........................
8-
10
InCanada ................................... 8-11
To General Motors
............................
8-
11
Defensive Driving ............................... 4-2
Defogger. Rear Window
.........................
3-
11
Defogging ............................ 3-3.3-7.
3-11
Defrosting
................................
3-3. 3-11
Dimensions. Vehicle
............................
6-7
1
Dolby
B
Noise Reduction
........................
3-16
Door
Locks
.......................................
2-4
Downshifting
..................................
2-31
Driver Information Center (DIC)
...................
2-87
Warnings and Messages
........................
2-97
Controls and Displays
.........................
2-88
ABS active .................................. 2-98
Charge System Fault
..........................
2-99
Coolant Over Temp
..........................
2- 101
Flat Tire
.
(lf.
lr.
rf.
rr)
........................
2-104
High Oil Temperature Reduce Engine rpm
........
2- 102
High Tire Pressure
.
(If.
lr.
rf.
rr)
................
2-105
High Trans Temp
............................
2- 102
Low Coolant ................................ 2-
101
LowOilLevel
...............................
2-99
Low
Oil
Pressure
.............................
2-98
Low Tire Pressure
.
(If. lr.
rf.
rr)
................
2-103
Maximum Speed
80
mph (129
Wh)
............
2-101
Reduced Engine Power
........................
2-99
ServiceABS
.................................
2-98
Service Column Lock
..........................
2-98
Service Ride Control
.........................
2-
101
Service Tire Monitor (MON) System
(SYS)
.......
2-106
Service Traction System
......................
2-100
Service Vehicle Soon
..........................
2-99
Shocks Inoperative
...........................
2-
10
1
Traction System
-
OFF
....................... 2-100
Traction System
-
ON ........................ 2-100
Traction System
(SYS)
Active
..................
2-100
Driver Position
.................................
1-11
Driving ........................................ 4-1
City
........................................
4-19
Defensive
....................................
4-2
Driver Information Center (DIC) Messages
9-3
Driving (Continued)
Drunken
.....................................
4-2
Freeway .................................... 4-20
InaBlizzard
.................................
4-26
IntheRain .................................. 4-17
Oncurves ..................................
4-10
OnSnowandIce
.............................
4-25
WetRoads
..................................
4-17
Winter ...................................... 4-24
In Foreign Countries
...........................
6-4
Night ...................................... 4-15
On Hill and Mountain Roads
....................
4-22
Through Deep Water
..........................
4-18
Drunken Driving
................................
4-2
Electrical Equipment. Adding .......... 2.23.3.27. 6.62
Electrical System
...............................
6-62
Electronic Dual Climate Control System
..............
3-4
Accessory Belt
...............................
6-72
Coolant
...........................
5-13,5-16, 6-22
Coolant Heater
...............................
2-24
Coolant Level Check
..........................
7-
11
Coolant Temperature Gage
................
2-8 1, 5- 13
Exhaust ........................... 2-15,2-37, 4-28
Identification ................................ 6-62
Oil,
Adding ................................. 6-12
Oil, Additives
................................
6-15
Oil, Life Monitor ............................. 6-15
EMT ......................................... 6-41
Engine
.......................................
6-10
FuseBlock .................................. 6-67
Oil
........................................
6-12
Oil, Checking
................................
6-12
OilLevelCheck
..............................
7-11
9-4
Oil. Used
...................................
6-16
Overheating
.................................
5-13
Specifications
................................
6-70
Oil, When to Change
..........................
6-15
Running While Parked
.........................
2-38
Starting Your
................................
2-22
Oil, Pressure Gage
............................
2-84
EnglisWMetric Button
...........................
2-77
Ethanol
........................................
6-4
Exhaust, Engine
......................
2-15,2-37, 4-28
Express-Down Window
..........................
2-41
Extended Mobility Tires
.........................
6-41
Fabric Cleaning
...............................
6-53
Fabric Protection
...............................
6-53
Fan Control Buttons
..........................
3-2, 3-6
Feature, Theft-Deterrent
.........................
2-17
Fiberglass Springs
..............................
6-59
Fifth Gear. Manual Transmission
...................
2-29
Filling
a
Portable Fuel Container
....................
6-8
Filling Your Tank
................................
6-5
Filter, Air Cleaner
..............................
6-17
Finish Damage
.................................
6-59
Finish Damage
.................................
6-59
First Gear, Automatic Transmission
................
2-28
First Gear, Manual Transmission
...................
2-29
Flashers, Hazard Warning
.........................
5-2
Flat Tire, What to Do
............................
5-22
Fluid Capacities
................................
6-71
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode
.....
5-13
Finishcare
....................................
6-56
FloorMats
....................................
2-59
FobTraining
...................................
2-97
FogLamps
....................................
2-51
Foreign Countries. Fuel
...........................
6-4
Fourth Gear. Manual Transmission
.................
2-29
French Language Manual
11
Front Sidemarker Lamp Bulb Replacement
...........
6-35
FrontTowing
..................................
5-10
Front
Turn
Signal Lamp Bulb Replacement
..........
6-35
Fuel
..........................................
6-3
Canada
..................................
6-4. 6-5
Gage
.......................................
2-86
In
Foreign Countries
...........................
6-4
Fuel. Filling Your Tank
...........................
6-5
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
.......................
6-64
..
...........................
Gages
Engine Coolant Temperature
....................
2-8
1
Engine Oil Pressure
...........................
2-84
Fuel
.......................................
2-86
Voltmeter ................................... 2-79
GAWR
..................................
4.29. 4.30
Gear Positions
..................................
2-26
Gross
Axle Weight Rating
...................
4.29. 4.30
Guide en Fransais
.................................
ii
GVWR
..................................
4.29. 4.30
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
.................
4.29. 4.30
Halogen Bulbs
................................
6-33
Hazard Warning Flashers
..........................
5-2
Headlamp Doors
...............................
2-44
HeadlampMighbeams Bulb Replacement
............
6-33
Headlamps
....................................
2-43
High/Low Beam Changer
......................
2-45
Wiring
.....................................
6-64
Hearing Impaired. Customer Assistance
..............
8-4
Heating
.......................................
3-10
...
Heritagepages
...................................
n1
Highway Hypnosis
..............................
4-22
Hill and Mountain Roads
.........................
4-22
Hood
.............................................
Checking Things Under
.........................
6-8
Release ...................................... 6-9
Horn
.........................................
2-41
Hydraulic Clutch
...............................
6-20
Ignition Switch
................................
2-20
Inadvertent Load Control
.........................
2-53
Inside DayNight Rearview Mirror
.................
2-53
Brakesystem
................................
7-15
Exhaust System
..............................
7-15
Radiator and Heater Hose
......................
7-15
Steering
....................................
7-15
Tire ........................................ 7-15
Wheel
......................................
7-15
Instrumentpanel
...............................
2-74
Brightness Control
............................
2-52
Cleaning
....................................
6-54
Cluster
.....................................
2-76
FuseBlock
..................................
6-64
Instrument Panel Cupholder
.......................
2-54
Interior Lamps
.................................
2-52
Jump Starting
..................................
5-3
High-BeamLamps
..............................
2-45
Hydroplaning
..................................
4-18
Inflation. Tire
..................................
6-44
Inspections
....................................
7-15
Suspension
..................................
7-15
.........
9-5
Key Lock Cylinders Service
.....................
7-12
Keys .......................................... 2-2
Labels
........................................
4-29
Certification
.................................
4-29
Service Parts Identification
.....................
6-62
Tire-Loading Information
......................
4-29
Vehicle Identification Number ................... 6-62
Lamps
........................................
2-50
Cleaning Exterior LampsLenses
.................
6-56
Courtesy
....................................
2-52
Exterior .................................... 2-50
Interior
.....................................
2-52
OnReminder ................................ 2-44
Lap Belt Cinch Feature
..........................
1-12
Latches. Seatback
................................
1-5
Leaving Your Vehicle
.............................
2-5
Leaving Your Vehicle with the Engine Running
.......
2-35
Lighter
.......................................
2-58
Liihts
Air Bag Readiness
.......................
1.20. 2.78
Anti-LGck Brake System Warning
................
2-80
Anti-Lock Brake Warning
..................
2.78. 4.7
Brake System Warning
.........................
2-78
CheckEngine
................................
2-84
CheckGages
................................
2-85
Safety Belt Reminder
......................
1.6.
2.78
Loading Your Vehicle
...........................
4-29
Security
....................................
2-85
Locks
.........................................
2-4
Cylinders
...................................
7-12
Door
........................................
2-4
Ignition Automatic Transmission Lock Check
......
7-14
Key Lock Cylinders Service
....................
7-12
PowerDoor
..................................
2-5
Using the Wheel Lock Key
.....................
6-50
Lubricants and Fluids
............................
7-16
Lubrication Service. Body
........................
7-12
Magnesium Wheel Finish
.......................
6-59
Maintenance Record
............................
7-18
Maintenance Schedule
............................
7-1
Periodic Maintenance Inspections
................
7-15
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
.............
7-16
Scheduled Maintenance Services .................. 7-4
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................ 7-2
Maintenance. Underbody
.........................
6-59
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
......................
2-82
Comfort Control System
........................
3-2
Frontseat .................................... 1-2
Transmission Check
...........................
7-12
Transmission Fluid
............................
6-19
Transmission. Shifting
.........................
2-29
Transmission. Starting Your Engine
..............
2-22
Memory
.......................................
2-5
Methanol
......................................
6-4
Mirrors
.......................................
2-53
Convex Outside
..............................
2-54
Inside Daymight Rearview
.....................
2-53
Power Remote Control ......................... 2-54
Visor Vanity
.................................
2-58
MMT
.........................................
6-4
MountainRoads
................................
4-22
Multifunction Lever
.............................
2-42
Manual
9-6
Neutral
Automatic Transmission
.......................
2-27
Manual Transmission
..........................
2-29
Neutral. Manual Transmission
.....................
2-29
New Vehicle Break-In
...........................
2-20
Nightvision
...................................
4-15
Off-Road Recovery
............................
4- 12
Oil. Engine
....................................
6-12
One to Four Light
...............................
2-30
Outlet. Accessory
...............................
2-59
Overdrive. Automatic Transmission
................
2-28
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode
.......
5-
13
Overheating Engine
.............................
5
-
13
Owner Checks and Services
.......................
7-11
Owner Publications. Ordering
.....................
8- 12
InCanada
...................................
8-11
Paint Spotting. Chemical
........................
6-60
Park
Automatic Transmission
.......................
2-26
Shifting Into
.................................
2-34
Shifting Out of
...............................
2-36
.
Parking
AtNight
....................................
2-17
Brake
......................................
2-32
...
Lots
.......................................
2-1'1
Your Vehicle. Manual Transmission
..............
2-36
Parking Brake Mechanism Check
..................
7- 14
Over Things That Burn
........................
2-37
Passenger Position
..............................
1
-
18
Passing ....................................... 4- 12
Pass-Key@
....................................
2-18
Periodic Maintenance Inspections
..................
7-15
Portable Fuel Container. Filling a ................... 6-8
Door Locks
...................................
2-5
Remote Control Mirrors ........................ 2-54
Seat
.........................................
1-2
Steering
....................................
4-10
Steering Fluid
................................
6-26
Windows
...................................
2-40
Plug
.......................................
6-63
Powerseat
.....................................
1-2
Pregnancy, Use
of
Safety Belts
....................
1-17
Problems on the Road
............................
5-1
Publications, Service and Owner
...................
8-12
InCanada
...................................
8-11
Power
Racing or Other Competitive Driving
..............
2-24
Radio Reception ................................ 3-27
Radios
.......................................
3-12
Rain. Driving
In
................................
4-17
Reading Lamps
................................
2-53
Axle ....................................... 6-21
Axle Service
.................................
7-15
Storage
.....................................
2-56
Towing ..................................... 5-11
Window Defogger
............................
3-11
Reclining Seatbacks
..............................
1-3
Rear
Turn Signal and Taillamp Bulb Replacement
.......
6-35
Rearview Mirror, Inside Daymight
.................
2-53
Recommended Fluids
and
Lubricants
...............
7-16
9-7
Service
Bulletins. Ordering
............................
8-12
Manuals. Ordering
............................
8- 12
Parts Identification Label
.......................
6-62
Publications. Ordering
.........................
8- 12
Work. Doing Your Own
.........................
6-2
Service and Appearance Care
......................
6-1
Service and Owner Publications
...................
8-12
InCanada
...................................
8-11
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle
...........
1-24
Shiftspeeds
...................................
2-30
Shifting
.......................................
2-26
IntoPark
....................................
2-34
Out
of
Park
..................................
2-36
Signaling Turns
................................
2-42
Sixth Gear, Manual Transmission
..................
2-29
Skidding
......................................
4-14
Sound Equipment, Adding
........................
3-27
Specifications and Capacities
......................
6-70
Specifications, Engine
...........................
6-70
Speech Impaired, Customer Assistance
...............
8-4
Sportseat
...................................... l-3
Springs, Fiberglass
..............................
6-59
Stains, Cleaning
................................
6-53
Starter Switch Check
............................
7-
13
Starting Your Engine
............................
2-22
Steering
......................................
4-10
In Emergencies
...............................
4-
11
Power
......................................
4-10
Tips
........................................
4-10
Wheel, Tilt
..................................
2-41
Storage Compartments
...........................
2-54
Speedometer
...................................
2-77
Steam
...................................
5-14, 5-15
Storage. Vehicle ................................ 6-32
Stuck: In Sand. Mud. Ice or Snow
..................
5-22
Sunvisors
....................................
2-58
Surge Tank. Coolant
.............................
5-18
Symbols. Vehicle
..................................
x
System Controls. Comfort Control System
........
3-2. 3-4
Tachometer
..................................
2-77
TapePlayerCare
...............................
3-28
Temperature Controls
.....
...................
3-2.
3-4
Theft
.........................................
2-16
Theft-Deterrent Radio
...........................
3-25
Thermostat
....................................
6-26
Third Gear, Automatic Transmission
................
2-28
Third Gear, Manual Transmission
..................
2-29
Tilt Steering Wheel ............................. 2-41
Time, Setting the
...............................
3-12
Tirechains
....................................
6-51
Tire-Loading Information Label
...................
4-29
Tires ......................................... 6-40
Alignment and Balance
........................
6-48
Buying New
.................................
6-45
Cleaning
....................................
6-58
Extended Mobility
............................
6-41
If
One Goes Flat
..............................
5-22
Inflation
....................................
6-44
Inflation Check
...............................
7-11
Inspection and Rotation
........................
6-45
Loading
....................................
4-29
Pressure
....................................
6-44
Temperature
.................................
6-48
Traction
....................................
6-47
Treadwe
ar
...................................
6-47
9-9
Tires (Continued)
Uniform Quality Grading
.......................
6-47
Wear Indicators
..............................
6-45
Wheel Replacement
...........................
6-48
When It’s Time for New
.......................
6-45
TorqueLock ................................... 2-35
Torque, Wheel
Nut
..............................
6-71
Towing a Trailer
................................
4-30
Towing Your Vehicle ............................. 5-8
Traction Control System
..........................
4-8
Traction Control System (TCS) Light ............... 2-81
.....................................
Top Strap 1-31
TrailerTowing
.................................
4-30
Transmission Fluid
Automatic 6- 18
...................................
Manual
.....................................
6-19
Transmission, Ignition Lock Check ................. 7-14
Transmitters, Remote Function Actuation System
......
2-6
Transportation, Courtesy
..........................
8-8
Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator ............. 2-42
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
...................
2-42
TTYUsers
......................................
8-4
Underbody Flushing Service
.....................
7-14
Universal Theft-Deterrent System
..................
2- 17
Vehicle
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your
........... 6-3
Control
......................................
4-5
Damage Warnings
..............................
ix
Dimensions
.................................
6-71
Identification Number
.........................
6-62
Ventilation System
..............................
3-11
Visor Vanity Mirrors
............................
2-58
Loading
....................................
4-29
Storage
.....................................
6-32
Visors, Sun
....................................
2-58
Voltmeter
.....................................
2-79
warning Devices
...............................
5-3
Warning Lights. Gages and Messages
...............
2-77
Warranty Information
............................
8-10
Washer Fluid. Windshield
........................
6-27
Washing Your Vehicle
...........................
6-56
Weatherstrips .................................. 6-55
Alignment
..................................
6-48
NutTorque
..................................
6-71
Wheel
Replacement
.................................
6-48
Using the Wheel Lock Key
.....................
6-50
Express-Down
...............................
2-41
Power
......................................
2-40
Windshield Washer ............................. 2-46
Fluid Level Check
............................
7-11
Windshield Wipers
..............................
2-45
Blade Replacement
...........................
6-37
Winter Driving
.................................
4-24
Wrecker Towing
.................................
5-8
Windows
.....................................
2-40
Fluid
.......................................
6-27
Fuses
......................................
6-64
WiperBladeCheck
.............................
7-12
Wiring, Headlamp
..............................
6-64
9-10
.
b%
NOTES
b
NOTES
9-12
@%
NOTES
9-13
NOTES
9-14
b
NOTES
9-15
bb
NOTES
$&I
NOTES
9-17
@%
NOTES

Navigation menu